Cat.No. W356–E1–2
SYSMAC
CPM2C
Programmable Controller
OPERATION MANUAL
CPM2C Programmable Controller
Operation Manual
Revised January 2000
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
! WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
! Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
!
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers
to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything else.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation
of the product.
1, 2, 3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
OMRON, 1999
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
CPM2C Features and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structure and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions Listed by Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparison with the CPM1A and CPM2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 2
Unit Components and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-2
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3
Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
Design Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting an Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the CPM2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 4
Using Programming Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
SYSMAC-CPT Support Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSMAC Support Software (SSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Console Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 5
Test Runs and Error Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-diagnostic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Console Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 6
Expansion Memory Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-2
6-3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications and Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
xii
xii
xii
xiii
xiv
xvi
1
2
7
11
18
20
27
29
30
40
59
60
61
62
65
103
104
111
114
122
145
151
152
153
156
156
158
166
167
169
170
171
172
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Appendices
A Standard Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
179
185
191
197
About this Manual:
The CPM2C is a compact, high-speed Programmable Controller (PC) designed for control operations in
systems requiring from 10 to 120 I/O points per PC. There are two manuals describing the setup and
operation of the CPM2C: The CPM2C Operation Manual (this manual) and the CPM1/CPM1A/CPM2A/
CPM2C/SRM1(-V2) Programming Manual (W353). (The CPM1/CPM1A/CPM2A/CPM2C/SRM1(-V2)
Programming Manual is referred to as simply the Programming Manual in this manual.)
This manual describes the system configuration and installation of the CPM2C and provides a basic
explanation of operating procedures for the Programming Consoles. It also introduces the capabilities of
the SYSMAC Support Software (SSS) and SYSMAC-CPT Support Software. Read this manual first to
acquaint yourself with the CPM2C.
The Programming Manual (W353) provides detailed descriptions of the CPM2C’s programming functions. The SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manuals: Basics and C-series PCs (W247 and W248)
provide descriptions of SSS operations for the CPM2C and other SYSMAC C-series PCs. The SYSMACCPT Support Software Quick Start Guide (W332) and User Manual (W333) provide descriptions of ladder
diagram operations in the Windows environment. The CX-Programmer User Manual (W361) and the CXServer User Manual (W362) provide details of operations for the WS02-CXPC1-E CX-Programmer.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting
to install and operate the CPM2C.
Section 1 gives a brief overview of the steps involved in developing of a CPM2C System, describes the
possible system configurations, and describes the CPM2C’s special features and functions.
Section 2 provides the technical specifications of the Units that go together to create a CPM2C PC and
describes the main components of the Units.
Section 3 describes how to install and wire a CPM2C PC.
Section 4 describes SYSMAC and SYSMAC-CPT Support Software capabilities, how to connect the Programming Console, and how to perform the various programming operations.
Section 5 describes how to perform a test run and how to diagnose and correct the hardware and software errors that can occur during PC operation.
Section 6 describes how to use the CPM1-EMU01-V1 Expansion Memory Unit.
Appendix A provides tables of CPM2C Units and related products.
Appendix B provides the dimensions of CPM2C Units.
! WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each
section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section
and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
ix
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Controller (PC) and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable Controller. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a
PC system.
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
xii
xii
xiii
xiv
xvi
xi
3
Safety Precautions
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications
described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual
or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that
may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult
your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the
systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual
close at hand for reference during operation.
! WARNING It is extremely important that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified
purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can
directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PC System to the above-mentioned
applications.
3
Safety Precautions
! WARNING Connect the ground terminal of the Power Supply Unit (CPM2C-PA201) to a
ground or 100 Ω or less. Not doing so may result in electric shock.
! WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing so
may result in electric shock.
! WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
! WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do so
may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
! WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, in order to ensure safety in the system
if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor
affecting the PC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
xii
Operating Environment Precautions
4
• The PC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects any
error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed. As a countermeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
• The PC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of the
output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for
such problems, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in
the system.
• If the 24-VDC output (service power supply) of the Power Supply Unit
(CPM2C-PA201) is overloaded or shorted, the voltage may drop causing outputs to turn OFF. External safety measures must be provided to ensure safety
in the system in such an event.
! WARNING When handling the Memory Backup Battery, never drop, disassemble, distort,
short-circuit, recharge, heat to a temperature exceeding 100°C, or throw into
fire. Otherwise the Battery may explode, catch fire, or leak fluid.
! WARNING When transferring programs to other nodes, or when making changes to I/O
memory, confirm the safety of the destination node before transfer. Not doing so
may result in injury.
4
! Caution
Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused
by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be readable.
! Caution
Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the Power Supply Unit
(CPM2C-PA201) to a torque of 0.74 to 0.9 NSm. Loose screws may result in
burning or malfunction.
! Caution
Do not connect the 24-VDC output (service power supply) or the Power Supply
Unit (CPM2C-PA201) to an AC power supply. Connecting it to an AC power supply will damage the internal circuit.
Operating Environment Precautions
! Caution
Do not operate the control system in the following places:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in
the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
! Caution
Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the
following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
xiii
5
Application Precautions
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
! Caution
5
The operating environment of the PC System can have a large effect on the longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can lead to
malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PC System. Be
sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system.
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PC System.
! WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.
• Always connect to a ground such that the grounding resistance does not exceed 100 Ω when installing the Units. Not connecting to the correct ground
may result in electric shock.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PC before attempting any of the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric
shock.
• Assembling the Units.
• Connecting or disconnecting the Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units.
• Connecting or wiring the cables.
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.
• Setting DIP switches.
• Replacing the battery
! Caution
Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the
PC or the system, or could damage the PC or PC Units. Always heed these precautions.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
• Construct a control circuit so that power supply for the I/O circuits does not
come ON before power supply for the Unit. If power supply for the I/O circuits
comes ON before power supply for the Unit, normal operation may be temporarily interrupted.
• If the operating mode is changed from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM
mode, with the IOM Hold Bit ON, the output will hold the most recent status. In
such a case, ensure that the external load does not exceed specifications. (If
operation is stopped because of an operation error (including FALS instructions), the values in the internal memory of the CPU Unit will be saved, but the
outputs will all turn OFF.)
• For models with only the super-capacitor installed, the contents of the READ/
WRITE enable area of the DM area, HR area, AR area, and CNT data area
may be damaged if the power is turned OFF for a long time. To prevent such
damage, provide ladder program that will check AR 1314 in order to ensure
proper operation of the system.
xiv
Application Precautions
5
• The life of relays largely varies depending on switching conditions. Be sure to
test operating conditions using actual Units and use the product within the specified number of switchings so as not to cause any performance problems. Using the product with performance problems may result in defective insulation
between circuits or burning of the relays.
• Install the Units properly so that they will not fall off.
• Be sure that all the mounting screws, terminal screws, and cable connector
screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals. Incorrect
tightening torque may result in malfunction.
• Be sure that the terminal blocks and other items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper locking may result in malfunction.
• Be sure that terminal blocks and connectors are connected in the specified direction with the correct polarity. Not doing so may result in malfunction.
• Use the Unit with the battery housing cover in place to prevent dust or foreign
matter from entering inside the Unit. Not doing so may result in malfunction.
• Install the expansion I/O connector cover to the last Unit (Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit) to prevent dust or foreign matter from entering inside the
Unit. Not doing so may result in malfunction.
• Be sure to attach the labels supplied with the CPM2C or provide other protective covers when wiring in order to prevent dust or wiring cuttings from entering
the Unit.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Use round crimp terminals for wiring the Power Supply Unit (CPM2C-PA201).
Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals. Connection of bare
stranded wires may result in burning.
• Be sure to perform wiring in accordance with the CPM2C Operation Manual.
Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Use specified connectors and wiring materials (connector models:
C500-CE241/C500-CE242/C500-CE243; terminal block models: AWG28-16
with stripped length of 7 mm; Power Supply Unit terminal block: AWG22-14
with stripped length of 7 mm).
• Do not apply voltages to the input terminals in excess of the rated input voltage.
Excess voltages may result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the output terminals in excess of the
maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in burning.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may
result in burning.
• Always use the power supply voltage specified in the operation manuals. An
incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on the
Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation.
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power supply. Incorrect wiring or switch settings may result in burning.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of
the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PC.
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• Before touching the Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in
order to discharge any static built-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or
damage.
xv
6
EC Directives
• Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit. Doing
either of these may break the cables.
• Do not apply forces exceeding 50 N to connector sections.
• Do not place objects on top of the cables. Doing so may break the cables.
• Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the contents of
the DM and HR Areas required for resuming operation. Not doing so may result
in an unexpected operation.
• Install the Unit properly as specified in the operation manual. Improper installation of the Unit may result in malfunction.
• When transporting the Units, use special packing boxes. Be careful not to apply excessive vibration or shock during transportation and not to drop the product.
• Store the Units within the following temperature and humidity ranges:
Storage temperature: –20 to 75°C, storage humidity: 10% to 90% (with no icing
or condensation)
• When using a thermocouple-input Temperature Sensor Unit, do not touch the
cold junction compensator. Doing so may result in incorrect temperature measurement.
6
EC Directives
6-1
Applicable Directives
• EMC Directives
• Low Voltage Directive
6-2
Concepts
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the
overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC
standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by the
customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of the
equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed. The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices and the
overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:
EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility): EN61131-2
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference):
EN50081-2
(Radiated emission: 10-m regulations)
Low Voltage Directive
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 VAC and 75 to
1,500 VDC meet the required safety standards for the PC (EN61131-2).
6-3
Conformance to EC Directives
The CPM2C PCs comply with EC Directives. To ensure that the machine or device in which the CPM2C PC is used complies with EC Directives, the PC must
be installed as follows:
1, 2, 3...
xvi
1. The CPM2C PC must be installed within a control panel.
2. Reinforced insulation or double insulation must be used for the DC power
supplies used for the communications and I/O power supplies.
6
EC Directives
3. CPM2C PCs complying with EC Directives also conform to the Common
Emission Standard (EN50081-2). Radiated emission characteristics (10-m
regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel
used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring, and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that the overall machine or equipment
complies with EC Directives.
6-4
Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods
The CPM2C PCs conform to the Common Emission Standards (EN50081-2) of
the EMC Directives. However, the noise generated when the PC is switched ON
or OFF using the relay output may not satisfy these standards. In such a case, a
noise filter must be connected to the load side or other appropriate countermeasures must be provided external to the PC.
Countermeasures taken to satisfy the standards vary depending on the devices
on the load side, wiring, configuration of machines, etc. Following are examples
of countermeasures for reducing the generated noise.
Countermeasures
(Refer to EN50081-2 for more details.)
Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the
whole system with the PC included is less than 5 times per minute.
Countermeasures are required if the frequency of load switching for the whole
system with the PC included is 5 times or more per minute.
xvii
6
EC Directives
Countermeasure Examples
When switching an inductive load, connect a surge protector, diodes, etc., in parallel with the load or contact as shown below.
Circuit
Current
AC
Power
supply
Yes
Yes
Inductive
load
CR method
Characteristic
Required element
If the load is a relay or solenoid, there
is a time lag between the moment the
circuit is opened and the moment the
load is reset.
The capacitance of the capacitor must
be 1 to 0.5 µF per contact current of
1 A and resistance of the resistor must
be 0.5 to 1 Ω per contact voltage of
1 V. These values, however, vary with
the load and the characteristics of the
relay. Decide these values from
experiments, and take into
consideration that the capacitance
suppresses spark discharge when the
contacts are separated and the
resistance limits the current that flows
into the load when the circuit is closed
again.
DC
If the supply voltage is 24 to 48 V,
insert the surge protector in parallel
with the load. If the supply voltage is
100 to 200 V, insert the surge
protector between the contacts.
The dielectric strength of the capacitor
must be 200 to 300 V. If the circuit is
an AC circuit, use a capacitor with no
polarity.
Power
supply
No
Yes
Inductive
load
Varistor method
Power
supply
Yes
Inductive
load
Diode method
Yes
The diode connected in parallel with
the load changes energy accumulated
by the coil into a current, which then
flows into the coil so that the current
will be converted into Joule heat by
the resistance of the inductive load.
The reversed dielectric strength value
of the diode must be at least 10 times
as large as the circuit voltage value.
The forward current of the diode must
be the same as or larger than the load
current.
This time lag, between the moment
the circuit is opened and the moment
the load is reset, caused by this
method is longer than that caused by
the CR method.
The reversed dielectric strength value
of the diode may be two to three times
larger than the supply voltage if the
surge protector is applied to electronic
circuits with low circuit voltages.
The varistor method prevents the
imposition of high voltage between the
contacts by using the constant voltage
characteristic of the varistor. There is
time lag between the moment the
circuit is opened and the moment the
load is reset.
---
If the supply voltage is 24 to 48 V,
insert the varistor in parallel with the
load. If the supply voltage is 100 to
200 V, insert the varistor between the
contacts.
xviii
SECTION 1
Introduction
This section describes the CPM2C’s special features and functions, shows the possible system configurations, and outlines the
steps required before operation. Read this section first when using the CPM2C for the first time.
Refer to the CPM1/CPM1A/CPM2A/CPM2C/SRM1(-V2) Programming Manual (W353) for details on programming operations.
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
CPM2C Features and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1 CPM2C Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-2 Overview of CPM2C Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1 Stand-alone CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2 Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-3 CPU Unit, Expansion Units, and Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structure and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-1 CPU Unit Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-2 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-3 Operating Mode at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-4 PC Operation at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-5 Cyclic Operation and Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions Listed by Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparison with the CPM1A and CPM2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
6
7
7
8
8
11
11
12
12
13
14
18
20
27
1
CPM2C Features and Functions
1-1
Section
1-1
CPM2C Features and Functions
1-1-1 CPM2C Features
The CPM2C PCs incorporate a variety of features in a compact Unit, including
synchronized pulse control, interrupt inputs, pulse outputs, and a clock function.
The CPM2C CPU Unit is a stand-alone Unit that can handle a broad range of
machine control applications and it is small enough to be incorporated as the
control unit in almost any free-standing machine.
The full complement of communications functions provide communications with
personal computers, other OMRON PCs, and OMRON Programmable Terminals. These communications capabilities allow the user to design a low-cost distributed production system.
The communications port can be used simultaneously as two ports: Peripheral and RS-232C.
The peripheral port supports Programming Devices,
Host Link, and no-protocol communications.
The RS-232C port supports Host Link, no-protocol
(serial), 1:1 Link, and 1:1 NT Link communications.
CPU Units with 10 I/O points (relay or transistor
outputs) or 20 I/O points (transistor outputs only)
are available. Expansion I/O Units can be connected to increase capacity to 140 I/O points.
Basic Functions
CPU Unit Variations
The CPM2C PCs are one-piece PCs with 10 or 20 I/O points in I/O terminals or a
built-in connector. There are 3 types of outputs available (relay outputs, sinking
transistor outputs, and sourcing transistor outputs). All CPM2C PCs require
a 24-VDC power supply.
Expansion I/O Units
Up to 5 Expansion I/O Units can be connected to the CPU Unit to increase the
PC’s I/O capacity to a maximum of 140 I/O points. There are 10 different Expansion I/O Units available, including Units with 24 I/O points, 10 I/O points, 8 input
points, 8 output points, 16 inputs points, and 16 output points. The maximum I/O
capacity of 140 I/O points is achieved by connecting five 24-point Expansion I/O
Units to a CPU Unit with 20 built-in I/O points.
Share Programming
Devices
The same Programming Devices, such as Programming Consoles and Support
Software, can be used for the C200H, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE, CQM1,
CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, and SRM1(-V2) PCs, so existing ladder program resources can be used effectively.
2
Section
CPM2C Features and Functions
1-1
Built-in Motor Control Capability
Synchronized Pulse
Control
(Transistor Outputs Only)
Synchronized pulse control provides an easy way to synchronize the operation
of a peripheral piece of equipment with the main equipment. The output pulse
frequency can be controlled as some multiple of the input pulse frequency, allowing the speed of a peripheral piece of equipment (such as a supply conveyor)
to be synchronized with the speed of the main piece of equipment.
CPM2C
Encoder
Motor driver Motor
Pulses are output as a fixed multiple of the input frequency.
High-speed Counters and
Interrupts
The CPM2C has a two kinds of high-speed counter inputs. The high-speed
counter input has a response frequency of 20 kHz/5 kHz and the interrupt inputs
(in counter mode) have a response frequency of 2 kHz.
The single high-speed counter can be used in any one of the four input modes:
differential phase mode (5 kHz), pulse plus direction input mode (20 kHz), up/
down pulse mode (20 kHz), or increment mode (20 kHz). Interrupts can be triggered when the count matches a set value or falls within a specified range.
The interrupt inputs (counter mode) can be used for incrementing counters or
decrementing counters (2 kHz) and trigger an interrupt (executing the interrupt
program) when the count matches the target value. Four interrupt inputs can be
used in the 20-point CPU Units and two interrupt inputs can be used in the
10-point CPU Units.
Easy Position Control
with Pulse Outputs
(Transistor Outputs Only)
CPM2C PCs with transistor outputs have two outputs that can produce 10 Hz to
10 kHz pulses (single-phase outputs).
When used as single-phase pulse outputs, there can be two outputs with a frequency range of 10 Hz to 10 kHz with a fixed duty ratio or 0.1 to 999.9 Hz with a
variable duty ratio (0 to 100% duty ratio).
When used as pulse plus direction or up/down pulse outputs, there can be just
one output with a frequency range of 10 Hz to 10 kHz.
High-speed Input Capabilities for Machine Control
High-speed Interrupt
Input Function
The 20-point CPU Units have 4 inputs that can be used as interrupt inputs and
the 10-point CPU Units have 2 inputs that can be used as interrupt inputs. These
inputs are shared with quick-response inputs and interrupt inputs in counter
mode and have a minimum input signal width of 50 µs and response time of
0.3 ms. When an interrupt input goes ON, the main program is stopped and the
interrupt program is executed.
Quick-response Input
Function
Regardless of the cycle time, the 20-point CPU Units have 4 inputs that can be
used as quick-response inputs and the 10-point CPU Units have 2 inputs that
can be used as quick-response inputs. These inputs are shared with interrupt
inputs and interrupt inputs in counter mode; they can reliably read input signals
with a signal width as short as 50 µs.
Stabilizing Input Filter
Function
The input time constant for all inputs can be set to 1 ms, 2 ms, 3 ms, 5 ms,
10 ms, 20 ms, 40 ms, or 80 ms. The effects of chattering and external noise can
be reduced by increasing the input time constant.
Other Functions
Interval Timer Interrupts
The interval timer can be set between 0.5 and 319,968 ms and can be set to generate just one interrupt (one-shot mode) or periodic interrupts (scheduled interrupt mode).
3
CPM2C Features and Functions
Section
1-1
Calendar/Clock
In CPU Units with a built-in clock, the clock (accuracy within 1 minute/month) can
be read from the program to show the current year, month, day, day of the week,
and time. The clock can be set from a Programming Device (such as a Programming Console) or the time can be adjusted by rounding up or down to the nearest
minute.
Long-term Timer
TIML(––) is a long-term timer that accommodates set values up to 99,990 seconds (27 hours, 46 minutes, 30 seconds). When combined with the SECONDS
TO HOURS conversion instruction (HMS(––)), the long-term timer provides an
easy way to control equipment scheduling.
Greater Data Handling Capability with Expansion Units
Analog I/O Supported
Up to 4 Analog I/O Units can be mounted to the CPM2C. For each Analog I/O
Unit mounted to the Unit, 2 analog input points and 1 analog output point are
available. By mounting 4 Analog I/O Units, a maximum of 8 analog input points
and 4 analog output points can be made available. (By using a combination of
the PID(––) instruction and PWM(––) instruction, time proportional control is
possible.)
• The ranges supported for analog input signals are 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, –10 to
10 V, 0 to 20 mA, and 4 to 20 mA, and the resolution is 1/6000 (full scale). The
average processing function and power interruption detection function can be
used.
• The ranges supported for analog output signals are 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, –10 to
10 V, 0 to 20 mA, and 4 to 20 mA, and the resolution is 1/6000 (full scale).
Temperature Sensor
Units
Up to 4 Temperature Sensor Units can be mounted to the CPM2C. There are 2
models of Temperature Sensor Unit: One for input from a thermocouple sensor
and one for input from a platinum resistance thermometer sensor. There are 2
input points on each Temperature Sensor Unit.
• Thermocouple inputs (and measurement ranges): K (–200 to 1,300°C, 0.0 to
500.0°C), J (-100 to 850°C, 0.0 to 400.0°C).
• Platinum resistance thermometer inputs (and measurement ranges): Pt100
(–200.0 to 650.0°C), JPt100 (–200.0 to 650.0°C).
CompoBus/S I/O Link
Units
The CPM2C can be used as a CompoBus/S Slave (with 8 built-in inputs and 8
built-in outputs) by connecting a CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit. Up to 5 CompoBus/S I/O Link Units can be connected to the CPM2C. In addition to the conventional “PC + Remote I/O” type of distributed I/O control, “PC + miniature PC” distributed CPU control is now possible. This means increased modularization,
allowing greater standardization of design, improved suitability to special needs,
and easier replacement of malfunctioning Units.
4
Section
CPM2C Features and Functions
1-1
Complete Communications Capabilities
A Host Link connection can be made through the PC’s communications port
used as a RS-232C or peripheral port. A personal computer or Programmable
Terminal connected in Host Link mode can be used for operations such as reading/writing data in the PC’s I/O memory or reading/changing the PC’s operating
mode.
1:N Host Link Communications
Commands
1:1 Host Link Communications
Commands
Host Link
B500-AL004
Link Adapter
CPM2C
CPM2C
Responses
Responses
NT-AL001
(Up to 32 PCs can be connected.)
No-protocol
Communications
The TXD(48) and RXD(47) instructions can be used in no-protocol mode to exchange data with standard serial devices. For example, data can be received
from a bar code reader or transmitted to a serial printer. The serial devices can
be connected to the communications port as a RS-232C or peripheral port.
Inputting data from
a bar code reader
Bar code
reader
High-speed 1:1 NT Link
Communications
CPM2C
CPM2C
Serial
printer
In a 1:1 NT Link, an OMRON Programmable Terminal (PT) can be connected
directly to the CPM2C. The PT must be connected to the communications port
as an RS-232C port (not as a peripheral port).
OMRON PT
One-to-one PC Link
Outputting data to
a serial printer
CPM2C
A CPM2C can be linked directly to another CPM2C, CQM1, CPM1, CPM1A,
CPM2A, SRM1(-V2), or a C200HS or C200HX/HG/HE PC. The 1:1 PC Link al-
5
Section
CPM2C Features and Functions
1-1
lows automatic data link connections. The PC must be connected to the communications port as an RS-232C port (not as a peripheral port).
CPM2C
Expansion Memory Unit
CPM2C
The CPM1-EMU01-V1 Expansion Memory Unit is a program loader for smallsize or micro PCs. Using the CPM1-EMU01-V1, simple on-site transfer of user
programs and data memory is possible with PCs.
CPM2C
CPM2C-CN111
Expansion Memory Unit
EEPROM
CS1W-CN114
CPM2C
Indicator
UPLOAD+DM Button
UPLOAD Button
CPM2C-CIF01
1-1-2 Overview of CPM2C Functions
Main function
Interrupts
Variations/Details
Interrupt inputs
2 inputs in CPU Units with 10 I/O points, 4 inputs in CPU Units with 20 I/O points
Response time: 0.3 ms
Interval timer interrupts
1 input
Set value: 0.5 to 319,968 ms
Precision: 0.1 ms
High-speed counters
High-speed counter
1 input, see note 1.
Differential phase mode (5 kHz)
Pulse plus direction input mode (20 kHz)
Up/down input mode (20 kHz)
Increment mode (20 kHz)
Interrupt inputs (counter mode)
2 inputs in CPU Units with 10 I/O points,
4 inputs in CPU Units with 20 I/O points
Incrementing counter (2 kHz)
Decrementing counter (2 kHz)
6
Scheduled interrupts
One-shot interrupt
No interrupt
Count-check interrupt
(An interrupt can be generated when the
count equals the set value or the count
lies within a preset range.)
No interrupt
Count-up interrupt
Section
System Configurations
Main function
Pulse outputs
1-2
Variations/Details
2 outputs:
Single-phase pulse output without acceleration/deceleration (See note 2.)
10 Hz to 10 kHz
2 outputs:
Variable duty ratio pulse output (See note 2.)
0.1 to 999.9 Hz, duty ratio 0 to 100%
Synchronized pulse control
1 output:
Pulse output with trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration (See note 2.)
Pulse plus direction output, up/down pulse output, 10 Hz to 10 kHz
1 point, see notes 1 and 2.
Quick-response input
Input frequency range: 10 to 500 Hz, 20 Hz to 1 kHz, or 300 Hz to 20 kHz
Output frequency range: 10 Hz to 10 kHz
2 inputs in CPU Units with 10 I/O points, 4 inputs in CPU Units with 20 I/O points
Minimum input signal width: 50 µs
Input time constant
Determines the input time constant for all inputs. (Settings: 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 40, or 80 ms)
Calendar/Clock
Shows the current year, month, day of the week, day of the month, hour, minute, and
second.
Analog I/O functions using CPM2C-MAD11 Analog I/O Unit
Expansion Unit functions
Two analog inputs: Input range of 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, –10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA,
or 4 to 20 mA
One analog output: Output range of 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, –10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to
20 mA
Temperature sensing functions using CPM2C-TS001/101 Temperature Sensor Unit
Thermocouple input (measurement range): K (-200 to 1,300°C)
K (0.0 to 500.0°C)
J (–100 to 850°C)
J (0.0 to 400.0°C)
Platinum resistance thermometer (measurement range): Pt100 (–200.0 to 650.0°C)
JPt100 (–200.0 to 650.0°C)
CompoBus/S Slave functions using CPM2C-SRT21 CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit
Data exchange with the Master Unit via 8 inputs and 8 outputs.
Note
1. This input is shared by the high-speed counter and synchronized pulse control functions.
2. This output is shared by the pulse output and synchronized pulse control
functions. These functions can be used with transistor outputs only.
1-2
System Configurations
1-2-1 Stand-alone CPU Units
CPU Unit with 10 I/O Points
(relay outputs)
CPU Unit with 10 I/O Points
(transistor outputs)
CPU Unit with 20 I/O Points
(transistor outputs)
7
Section
System Configurations
CPU Unit
10 I/O points
I/O terminal block
(6 inputs,
4 outputs)
I/O connector
Inputs
6 inputs (24 VDC)
Outputs
4 relay outputs
6 inputs (24 VDC)
4 transistor outputs
(sinking)
4 transistor outputs
(sourcing)
20 I/O points
(12 inputs,
8 outputs)
I/O connector
12 inputs (24 VDC)
8 transistor outputs
(sinking)
8 transistor outputs
(sourcing)
Clock
1-2
Model
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
CPM2C-10CDR-D
CPM2C-10C1DR-D
CPM2C-10CDTC-D
CPM2C-10C1DTC-D
CPM2C-10CDT1C-D
CPM2C-10C1DT1C-D
CPM2C-20CDTC-D
CPM2C-20C1DTC-D
CPM2C-20CDT1C-D
CPM2C-20C1DT1C-D
1-2-2 Power Supply Unit
AC Power Supply Unit
Name
Ratings
AC Power Supply Unit
100 to 240 VAC input
24 VDC, 600 mA output
Model
CPM2C-PA201
1-2-3 CPU Unit, Expansion Units, and Expansion I/O Units
A series of up to 5 Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units can be connected to
the expansion I/O connector on the CPU Unit.
There are four types of Units available: Expansion I/O Units, an Analog I/O Unit,
Temperature Sensor Units, and a CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit.
CPU Unit
Expansion I/O Unit
or Expansion Unit
Expansion I/O Connector
(output side, no cover)
Expansion I/O Connector
(input side)
Expansion I/O Connector
(with cover)
A PC with 140 I/O points (the maximum) can be assembled by connecting five
Expansion I/O Units to a CPU Unit with 20 I/O points.
CPM2C-20CDTC-D
(12 inputs, 8 outputs)
× 1 Unit
+
CPM2C-24EDTC
× 5 Units = 92 inputs, 48 outputs
(16 inputs, 8 outputs)
Note Be sure that the power supply requirements of the CPU Unit, Expansion Units,
and Expansion I/O Units do not exceed the available capacity. Only three Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units can be connected when the NT-AL001
Adapter is connected to the communications port (as a RS-232C port).
8
Section
System Configurations
1-2
Expansion I/O Units
Expansion I/O Unit with
10 relay output points
Expansion I/O Unit with
24 transistor output points
Expansion I/O Unit with
8 relay output points
Expansion I/O Unit with
8 transistor output points
Unit
Expansion I/O Unit with
8 DC input points
Expansion I/O Unit with
16 DC input points
Expansion I/O Unit with
16 transistor output points
Inputs
Outputs
Model
10 I/O points
I/O terminals
6 inputs (24 VDC)
4 relay outputs
CPM2C-10EDR
6 inputs, 4 outputs
24 I/O points
I/O connector
16 inputs (24 VDC)
CPM2C-24EDTC
8 input points
I/O connector
8 inputs (24 VDC)
8 transistor outputs
(sinking)
8 transistor outputs
(sourcing)
---
16 input points
8 output points
I/O connector
16 inputs (24 VDC)
---
CPM2C-16EDC
I/O terminals
I/O connector
-----
8 relay outputs
8 transistor outputs
(sinking)
8 transistor outputs
(sourcing)
16 transistor outputs
(sinking)
16 transistor outputs
(sourcing)
CPM2C-8ER
CPM2C-8ETC
16 inputs, 8 outputs
--16 output points
I/O connector
-----
CPM2C-24EDT1C
CPM2C-8EDC
CPM2C-8ET1C
CPM2C-16ETC
CPM2C-16ET1C
Note Be sure that the power supply requirements of the CPU Unit, Expansion Units,
and Expansion I/O Units do not exceed the available capacity. Only three Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units can be connected when the NT-AL001
Adapter is connected to the communications port (as a RS-232C port).
9
Section
System Configurations
1-2
Expansion Units
CPM2C-MAD11
Analog I/O Unit
Unit
Analog I/O Unit
Temperature
Sensor Unit
CompoBus/S I/O
Link Unit
2 analog inputs
1 analog output
2 thermocouple
inputs
2 platinum
resistance
thermometer
inputs
8 input points and
8 output points for
the built-in outputs
and inputs of the
Master Unit
CPM2C-TS001
Temperature Sensor Unit
Max. number
Inputs
of Units
4
2 points, 2 words
allocated
4
2 points, 2 words
allocated
2 points, 2 words
allocated
5
8 points, 1 word
allocated
(Inputs from the
Master)
CPM2C-SRT21
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit
Outputs
Model
1 point, 1 word
allocated
---
CPM2C-MAD11
---
CPM2C-TS101
8 points, 1 word
allocated
(Outputs to the
Master)
CPM2C-SRT21
CPM2C-TS001
Adapter Units
Peripheral/RS-232C Adapter Unit
Unit
RS-422/232C Adapter Unit
Conversion
Peripheral/RS-232C Adapter Unit
RS-422/RS-232C Adapter Unit
Note
CPU Unit’s communications port →
Peripheral port + RS-232C port
CPU Unit’s communications port →
RS422 port + RS-232C port
Model
CPM2C-CIF01
CPM2C-CIF11
1. The CPM2C-CIF01 cannot be used with any PC model other than the
CPM2C. A CPM2C-CIF11 or another CPM2C-CIF01 cannot be connected
onto a CPM2C-CIF01.
2. Although a CPM2C-CN111 can be connected to a CPM2C-CIF01, it is not
possible to use the peripheral port and the RS-232C port on the
CPM2C-CN111 simultaneously. If an attempt is made to use both ports simultaneously, communications will not be performed properly and incorrect
operation may result.
10
Section
Structure and Operation
1-3
1-3
Structure and Operation
1-3-1 CPU Unit Structure
The following diagram shows the internal structure of the CPU Unit.
PC Setup
Program
Output circuits
External
input
devices
Input circuits
I/O memory
External
output
devices
Settings
Settings
Communications
port
Settings
Communications
switches
I/O Memory
The program reads and writes data in this memory area during execution. Part of
the I/O memory contains the bits that reflect the status of the PC’s inputs and
outputs. Parts of the I/O memory are cleared when the power is turned ON and
other parts are retained.
Note Refer to Section 3 Memory Areas in the Programming Manual (W353) for more
details on I/O memory.
Program
This is the program written by the user. The CPM2C executes the program cyclically. (Refer to 1-3-5 Cyclic Operation and Interrupts for details.)
The program can be divided broadly into two parts: the “main program” that is
executed cyclically and the “interrupt programs” that are executed only when the
corresponding interrupt is generated.
PC Setup
The PC Setup contains various startup and operating parameters. The PC Setup parameters can be changed from a Programming Device only; they cannot
be changed from the program.
Some parameters are accessed only when PC’s power supply is turned ON and
others are accessed regularly while the power is ON. It will be necessary to turn
the power OFF and then ON again to enable a new setting if the parameter is
accessed only when the power is turned ON.
Note Refer to Section 1 PC Setup in the Programming Manual (W353) for more details.
Communications
Switches
The Communications Switches determine whether the peripheral port and
RS-232C port connected through the communications port operate with the
standard communications settings or the communications settings in the PC
Setup.
11
Section
Structure and Operation
1-3
1-3-2 Operating Modes
CPM2C CPU Units have 3 operating modes: PROGRAM, MONITOR, and RUN.
The program cannot be executed in PROGRAM mode. This mode is used to
perform the following operations in preparation for program execution.
• Changing initial/operating parameters such as those in the PC Setup
• Writing, transferring, or checking the program
• Checking wiring by force-setting and force-resetting I/O bits
PROGRAM Mode
! Caution
The PC continues to refresh I/O bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so
devices connected to output points on the CPU Unit, Expansion Units, or Expansion I/O Units may operate unexpectedly if the corresponding output bit is turned
ON by changing the contents of I/O memory.
MONITOR Mode
The program is executed in MONITOR mode and the following operations can
be performed from a Programming Device. In general, MONITOR mode is used
to debug the program, test operation, and make adjustments.
• Online editing
• Monitoring I/O memory during operation
• Force-setting/force-resetting I/O bits, changing set values, and changing present values during operation
RUN Mode
The program is executed at normal speed in RUN mode. Operations such as
online editing, force-setting/force-resetting I/O bits, and changing set values/
present values cannot be performed in RUN mode, but the status of I/O bits can
be monitored.
1-3-3 Operating Mode at Startup
The operating mode of the CPM2C when the power is turned ON depends upon
the PC Setup settings and the Programming Console’s mode switch setting if a
Programming Console is connected.
PC Setup setting
Word
Bits
DM 6600 08 to 15
00 to 07
Operating mode
Setting
00
See note.
01
Startup mode is the same as the operating mode
before power was interrupted.
02
Startup mode is determined by bits 00 to 07.
00
PROGRAM mode
01
MONITOR mode
02
RUN mode
Note The startup mode depends upon the setting of Communications Switch 2 and
the Programming Device connected to the communications port (peripheral
port).
Programming Device
Note
12
Switch 2 OFF
None
PROGRAM mode
Programming Console
Operating mode set on the
Programming Console’s
mode switch
Other device
PROGRAM mode
(see note 1)
Switch 2 ON
RUN mode (see
note 2)
PROGRAM mode
(see note 1)
PROGRAM mode
1. The CPM2C will not be able to communicate with the Programming Device
in these cases.
Section
Structure and Operation
1-3
2. When the power is turned ON, the CPM2C will start in the RUN mode only
when the RS-232C cable is connected to the communications port with
switch 2 set to ON.
1-3-4 PC Operation at Startup
The time required for startup initialization depends on several factors, such as
the operating conditions (including power supply voltage, system configuration,
and ambient temperature) and the program contents.
Time Required for
Initialization
Power OFF Operation
Minimum Power Supply Voltage
The PC will stop and all outputs will be turned OFF if the power supply voltage
falls below 85% of the rated value.
Momentary Power Interruption
A power interruption will not be detected and CPU Unit operation will continue if
the power interruption lasts less than 2 ms.
A power interruption may or may not be detected for power interruptions somewhat longer than 2 ms.
When a power interruption is detected, the CPU Unit will stop operating and all
outputs will be turned OFF.
Automatic Reset
Operation will restart automatically when the power supply voltage is restored to
more than 85% of the rated voltage.
Timing Chart of Power OFF Operation
The power interruption detection time is the time required for a power interruption to be detected after the power supply voltage drops below 85% of the rated
value.
1, 2, 3...
1. Minimum power interruption detection time
Power interruptions that are shorter than 2 ms will not be detected.
2. Undetermined additional time
Power interruptions only slightly longer than the minimum power interruption time may not be detected.
85% of rated voltage
Detection of
power interruption
Program execution
1. Minimum time
2. Additional
time
Executing
Stopped
CPU reset signal
CPU Unit operation will CPU Unit operation may
continue if voltage is
continue if voltage is
restored in this region. restored in this region.
Note If the power supply voltage fluctuates around 85% of the PC’s rated voltage, PC
operation may stop and restart repeatedly. When repeated stopping and starting
13
Section
Structure and Operation
1-3
will cause problems with the controlled system, set up a protective circuit such
as a circuit that shuts OFF the power supply to sensitive equipment until the
power supply voltage returns to the rated value.
1-3-5 Cyclic Operation and Interrupts
Basic CPU Operation
Initialization processing is performed when the power is turned ON. If there are
no initialization errors, the overseeing processes, program execution, I/O refreshing, and communications port servicing are performed repeatedly (cyclically).
S Check hardware.
Startup initialization
S Check memory.
S Read data from flash memory (program,
read-only DM data, and PC Setup settings).
S Check for battery error.
Overseeing
processes
S Preset the watch (maximum) cycle time.
S Check program memory.
S Refresh bits for expansion functions.
PC cycle time
Program execution
Cycle time
calculation
S Execute the program.
(Refer to the Programming Manual (W353) for
details on cycle time and I/O response times.)
S Wait for minimum cycle time if a minimum
cycle time has been set in the PC Setup
(DM 6619).
S Calculate cycle time.
S Read input data from input bits.
14
I/O refreshing
S Write output data to output bits.
RS-232C port
servicing
S Perform RS-232C port communications
processing. (Can be changed in DM 6616.)
Peripheral port
servicing
S Perform peripheral port communications
processing. (Can be changed in DM 6617.)
Structure and Operation
Section
1-3
The cycle time can be read from a Programming Device.
AR 14 contains the maximum cycle time and AR 15 contains the present cycle
time in multiples of 0.1 ms.
The cycle time will vary slightly depending on the processing being performed in
each cycle, so the calculated cycle time will not always match the actual cycle
time.
Program Execution in
Cyclic Operation
The following diagram shows the cyclic operation of the CPM2C when the program is being executed normally.
Normally, the results of program execution are transferred to I/O memory just
after program execution (during I/O refreshing), but IORF(97) can be used to refresh a specified range of I/O words during program execution. The specified
range of I/O words will be refreshed when IORF(97) is executed.
The cycle time is the sum of the time required for program execution, I/O refreshing, and communications port servicing.
A minimum cycle time (1 to 9,999 ms) can be set in the PC Setup (DM 6619).
When a minimum cycle time has been set, CPU operation is paused after program execution until the minimum cycle time is reached. CPU operation will not
be paused if the actual cycle time is longer than the minimum cycle time set in
DM 6619.
Note A fatal error will occur and PC operation will stop if a maximum cycle time has
been set in the PC Setup (DM 6618) and the actual cycle time exceeds that setting.
The default settings for RS-232C and peripheral port servicing are 5% each of
the cycle time, but these settings can be changed (between 0% and 99%) in the
PC Setup. The RS-232C port’s setting is in DM 6616 and the peripheral port’s
setting is in DM 6617.
15
Section
Structure and Operation
1-3
Refer to Section 7 PC Operations and Processing Time in the Programming
Manual (W353) for more details and precautions on the cycle time.
Overseeing processes
Main program
Cycle
time
If a minimum cycle time has been
set in DM 6619, CPU operation is
paused until the minimum cycle
time is reached.
I/O refreshing
RS-232C port servicing
Peripheral port servicing
Interrupt Program
Execution
16
The servicing time can be set
in DM 6616.
The servicing time can be set
in DM 6617.
When an interrupt is generated during execution of the main program, main program execution is interrupted immediately and the interrupt program is executed. The following diagram shows the cyclic operation of the CPM2C when an
interrupt program is executed.
Normally, the results of interrupt program execution are transferred to I/O
memory just after program execution (during I/O refreshing), but IORF(97) can
be used to refresh a specified range of I/O words during execution of the interrupt program. The specified range of I/O words will be refreshed when IORF(97)
is executed.
The normal cycle time is extended by the time required for execution of the interrupt program.
Section
Structure and Operation
1-3
Refer to Section 7 PC Operations and Processing Time in the Programming
Manual (W353) for more details and precautions on the cycle time.
Overseeing processes
Main program
Interrupt generated.
Interrupt program
Cycle
time
I/O refreshing
RS-232C port servicing
Peripheral port servicing
! Caution
Immediate Refreshing
Although IORF(97) can be used in interrupt subroutines, you must be careful of
the interval between IORF(97) executions. If IORF(97) is executed too frequently, a fatal system error may occur (FALS 9F), stopping operation. The interval between executions of IORF(97) should be at least 1.3 ms + total execution
time of the interrupt subroutine.
IORF(97) can be executed in the program to refresh a specified range of I/O
words. The specified I/O words will be refreshed when IORF(97) is executed.
IORF(97) can be used to refresh I/O from the main program or the interrupt program.
17
Section
Functions Listed by Usage
1-4
When IORF(97) is used, the cycle time is extended by the time required to refresh the specified I/O words.
Overseeing processes
Main program
IORF(97) executed.
Cycle
time
Immediate refreshing
I/O refreshing
I/O refreshing
RS-232C port servicing
Peripheral port servicing
1-4
Functions Listed by Usage
Machine Control Functions
Usage
Receive high-speed
count inputs
(For example, calculating
length or position with an
encoder).
Max. count frequency of 2 kHz
(single-phase)
Max. count frequency of 5 kHz (differential
phase) or 20 kHz (single-phase)
Generate a pulse output based on a multiple of an input pulse to
synchronize control of a peripheral process with the main process.
The multiple for the peripheral process (such as tool feed rate) can be
changed during operation by calculating the multiple from another input
value (such as an encoder) in the peripheral process.
This method can be used to change the process for different products
or models without stopping the equipment.
Reliably receive input pulses with an ON-time shorter than the cycle
time (such as inputs from a photomicrosensor).
18
Function
Use interrupt input (counter mode) to
read the present value without
interrupts.
Use high-speed counter to read the
present value without interrupts.
Pulse synchronization
Quick-response input function
Refer
to
W353
Section
Functions Listed by Usage
Usage
Interrupt functions
Function
Execute a special process very quickly
when an input goes ON.
(For example, operating a cutter when an
interrupt input is received from a Proximity
Switch or Photoelectric Switch.)
Interrupt input (interrupt input mode)
Count input ON pulses and execute a
special process very quickly when the
count reaches the preset value.
(For example, stopping the supply feed
when a preset number of workpieces have
passed through the system.)
Execute a special process at a preset
count value.
(For example, cutting material very
precisely at a given length.)
Execute a special process when the count
is within a preset range.
(For example, sorting material very quickly
when it is within a given length range.)
Execute a special process when a timer
times out.
(For example, stopping a conveyor at very
precise time (independent of the cycle
time) after the workpiece is detected.)
Interrupt input (counter mode)
1-4
Refer
to
W353
High-speed counter interrupt
generated when the count matches
the set value.
High-speed counter interrupt
generated when the count is within the
set range.
Interval timer interrupt
(One-shot mode)
Repeat a special process at regular
intervals.
(For example, the speed of a sheet feeder
can be monitored by measuring the input
signal from an encoder at regular intervals
and calculating the speed.)
Perform simple positioning by outputting pulses to a motor driver that
accepts pulse-train inputs.
Receive an analog input and output an analog output.
Interval timer interrupt
(Scheduled interrupt mode)
Receive temperature sensor input directly at the PC.
Temperature Sensor Unit
(Connect the Temperature Sensor
Unit to the CPU Unit.)
Pulse output function
Analog I/O Unit
(Connect the Analog I/O Unit to the
CPU Unit.)
Reduce required wiring, space, and PC load by controlling equipment
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit
with a few low-capacity PCs dispersed near the equipment rather than (Connect the CompoBus/S I/O Link
a single, large, centralized PC.
Unit to the CPU Unit.)
(Create a remote I/O link with a CompoBus/S Master and CompoBus/S
Slaves.)
Basic Functions
Usage
Function
Set the cycle time to a fixed interval.
Stop PC operation when the cycle time exceeds a
maximum setting.
Keep all outputs ON when PC operation stops.
Retain the contents of I/O memory when starting
operation.
Retain the contents of I/O memory when the PC is
turned ON.
Set a minimum (fixed) cycle time in the PC Setup.
Set a maximum (watch) cycle time in the PC Setup.
Eliminate effects from chattering and external noise.
Set a longer input time constant in the PC Setup.
Refer
to
W353
Turn ON the IOM Hold Bit (SR 25212).
Turn ON the IOM Hold Bit (SR 25212).
Turn ON the IOM Hold Bit (SR 25212) and set the PC
Setup (DM 6601) so that the status of the IOM Hold Bit
is maintained at startup.
19
Section
Comparison with the CPM1A and CPM2A
1-5
Maintenance Functions
Usage
Function
Refer
to
W353
Record data with time-stamp.
Establish user-defined errors for desired input
conditions. (Fatal and non-fatal errors can be defined.)
Clock/calendar function
FAL(06) defines non-fatal errors. (PC operation
continues.)
Read the number of power interruptions.
Set the startup operating mode.
FALS(07) defines fatal errors. (PC operation stops.)
The number of power interruptions is stored in AR 23.
Set the startup operating mode in the PC Setup
(DM 6600).
Communications Functions
Usage
Function
Read/write I/O memory data and change the operating
mode from a host computer.
Connect to a serial device such as a bar code reader
or serial printer.
Make a high-speed connection with an OMRON
Programmable Terminal.
Make a PC-PC data link connection with another
CPM2C, or a CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, SRM1, CQM1,
C200HS, or C200HX/HG/HE PC.
Host Link communications (Set the communications
mode to Host Link in the PC Setup.)
No-protocol communications (Set the communications
mode to no-protocol in the PC Setup.)
1:1 NT Link (Set the communications mode to 1:1 NT
Link in the PC Setup.)
1:1 PC Link (Set the communications mode to 1:1 PC
Link in the PC Setup.)
Connect a Programming Console.
Connect the Programming Console to the peripheral
port via the communications port. (Turn OFF
Communications Switch 2.)
Page
114
Connect a personal computer running SYSMAC
Support Software (SSS) or SYSMAC-CPT Support
Software.
The computer can be connected to the peripheral port
or RS-232C port via the communications port.
(Turn OFF Communications Switch 2.)
Page
108
Monitor equipment with a Programmable Terminal and
program the PC with a Programming Device.
The RS-232C port and peripheral port can be used
simultaneously via the communications port.
W353
Page
108,
114
1-5
Comparison with the CPM1A and CPM2A
Item
Instruction set
Basic instructions
Special instructions
Instruction
execution times
Basic instructions
Special instructions
Program capacity
Maximum
Stand-alone CPU Unit
number of I/O
points
CPU Unit with Expansion
I/O Units
Expansion
Maximum number of Units
Units and
Expansion I/O
Units
Available models
20
Refer
to
W353
CPM2C
CPM2A
14
105 instructions,
185 variations
LD: 0.64 µs
MOV(21): 7.8 µs
4,096 words
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
10 or 20 points
30, 40, or 60 points
130 or 140 points max.
90, 100, or 120
points max.
A maximum of 3
Units can be
connected to any of
the CPU Units.
A maximum of 5 Units
can be connected to
any of the CPU Units.
Expansion I/O Units,
Analog I/O Unit,
Temperature Sensor
Unit, and CompoBus/S
I/O Link Unit
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
CPM1A
Same as CPM2C.
79 instructions, 139
variations
LD: 1.72 µs
MOV(21): 16.3 µs
2,048 words
10, 20, 30, or 40
points
90 or 100 points
max.
A maximum of 3
Units can be
connected to the
30-point and 40-point
CPU Units.
Same as CPM2C.
Section
Comparison with the CPM1A and CPM2A
Item
I/O memory
CPM2C
IR 00000 to IR 00915
IR 01000 to IR 01915
928 bits:
IR 02000 to IR 04915,
IR 20000 to IR 22715
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
512 bits:
IR 20000 to IR 23115
SR (Special Relay) area
448 bits:
SR 22800 to SR 25515
Same as CPM2C.
384 bits:
SR 23200 to SR
25515
TR (Temporary Relay) area
HR (Holding Relay) area
8 bits: TR0 to TR7
320 bits:
HR 0000 to HR 1915
384 bits:
AR 0000 to AR 2315
256 bits:
LR 0000 to LR 1515
256 bits:
TIM/CNT 000 to
TIM/CNT 255
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
256 bits:
AR 0000 to AR 1515
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
128 bits:
TIM/CNT 0 to
TIM/CNT 127
2,048 words
(DM 0000 to DM 2047)
Same as CPM2C.
1,024 words
(DM 0000 to
DM 1023)
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Internal battery
backup
(5-year lifetime at
25°C, replaceable)
Capacitor backup
(20-day backup at
25°C)
4
4
Same as CPM2C.
Decrementing
counter
1 kHz
Contains counter
PV–1.
Read SR 244 to
SR 247.
(Counter PV – 1)
LR (Link Relay) area
Timer/Counter area
DM (Data
Read/write
Memory) area area
Read-only
area
PC Setup
456 words
(DM 6144 to DM 6599)
56 words
(DM 6600 to DM 6655)
Memory backup Program area, read-only DM Flash memory backup
area (including PC Setup)
Read/write DM area, HR
CPU Unit with clock:
area, AR area, and counters Internal battery backup
(2-year lifetime at 25°C,
replaceable)
Interrupt inputs (interrupt input mode)
Counter mode
Counter upper limit
SR 244 to SR 247
Interval timer
CPM1A
Input bits
Output bits
Work bits
AR (Auxiliary Relay) area
Interrupt inputs
(counter mode)
CPM2A
1-5
CPU Unit without clock:
Capacitor backup
(10-day backup at
25°C) or optional
battery backup (2 years
at 25°C, replaceable)
4 (20-point CPU Unit),
2 (10-point CPU Unit)
Incrementing counter
Decrementing counter
2 kHz
Contains counter PV.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Method(s) to read counter
PV
Read SR 244 to
SR 247.
Execute PRV(62).
Same as CPM2C.
Method to change counter
PV
One-shot mode
Scheduled interrupt mode
Execute INI(61).
Same as CPM2C.
Not supported.
Yes
Yes
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
21
Section
Comparison with the CPM1A and CPM2A
Item
Quick-response
inputs
High-speed
counter
Setting the quick-response
function
INT(89) (Mask)
INT(89) (Read mask)
PC Setup
INT(89) (Clear)
Minimum pulse width
Count mode
Not supported (ignored)
50 µs min.
Differential-phase (up/down) mode
Pulse plus direction mode
Up/down pulse mode
Increment mode
5 kHz in differential-phase (up/down)
mode
Max. counter frequency
Counter PV range
Check when registering
target value match table
Method used to reference
the target value match
interrupt table
Reading range-comparison
results
Reading status
Pulse synchronization
Pulse output
Trapezoidal acceleration/
control
deceleration
PWM(––) output
Number of simultaneous
pulse outputs
Maximum frequency
Minimum frequency
Pulse output quantity
Direction control
Positioning to absolute
positions
Bit status while pulses are
being output
Reading PV
Resetting PV
Status outputs
22
CPM2C/CPM2A
Not supported (ignored)
Reads mask status.
20 kHz in pulse plus direction mode,
up/down pulse mode, and increment
mode
–8,388,608 to 8,388,607 in
differential-phase (up/down) mode, pulse
plus direction mode, and up/down pulse
mode
0 to 16,777,215 in increment mode
Same direction, same SV not possible
Comparison of all values in the table,
regardless of order of appearance in table
1-5
CPM1A
PC Setup and INT(89)
(Unmask interrupt input.)
Supported.
Reads result of mask
setting.
Supported.
200 µs min.
Differential-phase
(up/down) mode
Increment mode
2.5 kHz in
differential-phase
(up/down) mode,
5 kHz in increment mode
–32,768 to 32,767 in
differential-phase
(up/down) mode
0 to 65,535 in increment
mode
Same direction, same SV
possible
Comparison in order of
appearance in table
Check AR 1100 to AR 1107 or execute
PRV(62).
Check AR 1108 (comparison in progress),
check AR 1109 (high-speed counter PV
overflow/underflow), or execute PRV(62).
Check AR 1100 to
AR 1107.
---
Supported.
Not supported.
Supported with ACC(––). The initial
frequency can be set.
Supported.
2 max.
Not supported.
10 kHz max.
10 Hz
–16,777,215 to 16,777,215
Supported.
Supported.
2 kHz max.
20 Hz
0 to 16,777,215
Not supported.
Not supported.
No effect
Turned ON/OFF by pulse
output
Not supported.
Read SR 228 through SR 231 or execute
PRV(62).
Supported.
Accelerating/decelerating
PV overflow/underflow
Pulse quantity set
Pulse output completed
Pulse output status
Not supported.
1 max.
Not supported.
Pulse output status
Section
Comparison with the CPM1A and CPM2A
Item
Analog controls
Clock function
Words containing
time info.
Analog I/O
Temperature monitoring
CompoBus/S communications
Communications switch
Battery
Battery
Battery
replacement
Life expectancy/
backup time
CPM2C
CPM2A
1-5
CPM1A
None
2
2
Internal or none
AR 17 to AR 21
Internal
AR 17 to AR 21
None
---
Analog I/O Units can be
connected.
The CPU Unit can receive
temperature sensor input
from either thermocouples
or platinum resistance
thermometers.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
A CompoBus/S I/O Link
Unit can be connected to
provide CompoBus/S Slave
functions.
This switch determines
whether communications
are governed by the
standard settings or PC
Setup settings. Also sets
the Programming Device
connection.
Same as CPM2C.
Same as CPM2C.
This switch determines
whether
communications are
governed by the
standard settings or
PC Setup settings.
None
CPU Unit with clock:
Internal lithium battery
backup
Lithium
None (capacitor
backup only)
Possible
---
5-year lifetime at 25°C
20-day backup at 25°C
Same as CPM2C.
---
CPU Unit without clock:
Capacitor backup or
optional lithium battery
backup
Possible
CPU Unit with clock: 2-year
lifetime at 25°C
CPU Unit without clock
(capacitor): 10-day backup
at 25°C
Battery error
detection
CPU Unit without clock
(lithium battery): 5-year
lifetime at 25°C
Supported.
23
Section
Comparison with the CPM1A and CPM2A
Item
Communications
(in CPU Unit)
CPM2C
CPM2A
CPM1A
1-5
Peripheral port (via
communications
port)
Programming Console
(Set with Communications
Switch.)
Peripheral bus
(Set with Communications
Switch.)
Host Link (with
Slave-initiated
communications)
No-protocol
Programming Console
(auto-detect)
Peripheral bus
(auto-detect)
Host Link (with
Slave-initiated
communications)
No-protocol
Programming Console
(auto-detect)
Peripheral bus
(auto-detect)
Host Link
1:1 PC LInk
1:1 NT Link
RS-232C port (via
communications
port)
Peripheral bus (Set with
Communications Switch.)
Host Link
No-protocol
1:1 PC LInk
1:1 NT Link
Can be set to 1, 2, 3, 5, 10,
20, 40, or 80 ms. (Default:
10 ms)
Peripheral bus
(auto-detect)
Host Link
No-protocol
1:1 PC LInk
1:1 NT Link
Same as CPM2C.
None
Input time constant
Can be set to 1, 2, 4,
8, 16, 32, 64, or
128 ms. (Default:
8 ms)
Note An optional battery (CPM2C-BAT01) can be mounted to CPU Units without
clocks.
Differences in Instruction Sets
Instructions added to
the CPM2C
24
Mnemonic
Name
TXD(48)
TRANSMIT
RXD(47)
RECEIVE
SCL(66)
SCALING
SCL2(––)
SIGNED BINARY TO BCD SCALING
SCL3(––)
BCD TO SIGNED BINARY SCALING
SRCH(––)
DATA SEARCH
MAX(––)
FIND MAXIMUM
MIN(––)
FIND MINIMUM
SUM(––)
SUM CALCULATION
FCS(––)
FCS CALCULATE
HEX(––)
ASCII-TO-HEXADECIMAL
AVG(––)
AVERAGE VALUE
PWM(––)
PULSE WITH VARIABLE DUTY RATIO
PID(––)
PID CONTROL
ZCP(––)
AREA RANGE COMPARE
ZCPL(––)
DOUBLE AREA RANGE COMPARE
NEG(––)
2’S COMPLEMENT
ACC(––)
ACCELERATION CONTROL
STUP(––)
CHANGE RS-232C SETUP
SYNC(––)
SYNCHRONIZED PULSE CONTROL
BINL(58)
DOUBLE BCD TO DOUBLE BINARY
BCDL(59)
DOUBLE BINARY TO DOUBLE BCD
TMHH(––)
VERY HIGH-SPEED TIMER
TIML(––)
LONG TIMER
SEC(––)
HOURS-TO-SECONDS
HMS(––)
SECONDS-TO-HOURS
Section
Comparison with the CPM1A and CPM2A
1-5
Instructions with Changed Specifications
Mnemonic
INI(61)
Name
CPM2C
MODE CONTROL
CPM1A
Supports the interrupt input (counter mode) PV
change operation.
Does not support these
operations.
Supports the pulse output PV change operation.
Supports the pulse synchronization control stop
operation.
PRV(62)
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER PV READ
Supports the interrupt input (counter mode) PV read
operation.
Does not support these
operations.
CTBL(63)
COMPARISON TABLE
LOAD
The count is compared with all of the target values
in the target value comparison table.
The count is compared
with each target value in
the order that they
appear in the target
value comparison table.
PULS(65)
SET PULSES
Supports absolute pulse specification, but the
coordinate system must be set to absolute
coordinates.
Does not support
absolute pulse
specification.
INT(89)
INTERRUPT CONTROL
Supports a count-up interrupt for incrementing
counters.
Does not support this
interrupt function.
Supports the pulse output PV read operation.
! Caution
Added Function Code
Allocations
Before using a CPM1A program containing one or more of the instructions in the
table above, check the program to be sure that it will operate properly and edit
the program if necessary. The CPM2C may not operate properly if a CPM1A program with these instructions is transferred and executed unchanged.
The following three instructions are allocated function codes that were not used
in the CPM1A.
Instruction
RXD(47)
TXD(48)
SCL(66)
CPM2C
RECEIVE
TRANSMIT
SCALING
CPM1A
Not allocated. (NOP(00))
Differences in I/O Memory
SR Area Differences
The following table shows differences in the SR area. (PV is the abbreviation for
present value.)
Function
Pulse output 0 PV
Pulse output 1 PV
Pulse output 0 PV Reset Bit
Pulse output 1 PV Reset Bit
RS-232C Port Reset Bit
Battery Error Flag
Changing RS-232C Port Setup Flag
CPM2C
SR 228 to SR 229
SR 230 to SR 231
SR 25204
SR 25205
SR 25209
SR 25308
SR 25312
CPM1A
Not
supported.
25
Section
Comparison with the CPM1A and CPM2A
AR Area Differences
1-5
The following table shows differences in the AR area.
Function
CPM2C
Clock/calendar data
RS-232C Communications Error Code
RS-232C Error Flag
RS-232C Transmission Enabled Flag
RS-232C Reception Completed Flag
RS-232C Reception Overflow Flag
Peripheral Port Reception Completed Flag
Peripheral Port Reception Overflow Flag
RS-232C Reception Counter
High-speed Counter Comparison Flag
High-speed Counter Overflow/Underflow Flag
Pulse Output 0 Output Condition
Pulse Output 0 PV Overflow/Underflow Flag
Pulse Output 0 Pulse Quantity Set Flag
Pulse Output 0 Output Completed Flag
Pulse Output 1 PV Overflow/Underflow Flag
Pulse Output 1 Pulse Quantity Set Flag
Pulse Output 1 Output Completed Flag
Pulse Output 1 Output Status
Power OFF Counter
AR 17 to AR 21
AR 0800 to AR 0803
AR 0804
AR 0805
AR 0806
AR 0807
AR 0814
AR 0815
AR 09
AR 1108
AR 1109
AR 1111
AR 1112
AR 1113
AR 1114
AR 1212
AR 1213
AR 1214
AR 1215
AR 23 (See note.)
CPM1A
Not
supported.
AR 10
Note CPM1A programs that use AR 10 (the Power OFF Counter) cannot be used in
the CPM2C without editing the program. In the CPM2C, the Power OFF Counter
is in AR 23.
DM Area Differences
The following table shows differences in the DM area other than the PC Setup.
Function
Error Log Area
CPM2C
CPM1A
DM 2000 to DM 2021 DM 1000 to DM 1021
Note CPM1A programs that use the Error Log Area cannot be used in the CPM2C
without editing the program to change the location of the Error Log Area.
26
Section
Preparation for Operation
1-6
The following table shows differences in the PC Setup.
Function
1-6
CPM2C
RS-232C Port Servicing Time Setting
RS-232C Port Servicing Time Enable
Pulse Output 0 Coordinate System
Pulse Output 1 Coordinate System
DM 6616 bits 00 to 07
DM 6616 bits 08 to 15
DM 6629 bits 00 to 03
DM 6629 bits 04 to 07
RS-232C Communications Settings Selector
RS-232C Port CTS Control Settings
RS-232C Port Link Words for 1:1 PC Link
RS-232C Port Communications Mode
RS-232C Port Baud Rate
RS-232C Port Frame Format
RS-232C Port Transmission Delay
RS-232C Port Host Link Node Number
RS-232C Port No-protocol Start Code Enable
RS-232C Port No-protocol End Code Enable
RS-232C Port No-protocol Start Code Setting
RS-232C Port No-protocol End Code Setting
or Number of Bytes Received
Peripheral Port No-protocol Start Code Enable
Peripheral Port No-protocol End Code Enable
Peripheral Port No-protocol Start Code Setting
Peripheral Port No-protocol End Code Setting
or Number of Bytes Received
Battery Error Detect Setting
DM 6645 bits 00 to 03
DM 6645 bits 04 to 07
DM 6645 bits 08 to 11
DM 6645 bits 12 to 15
DM 6646 bits 00 to 07
DM 6646 bits 08 to 15
DM 6647
DM 6648 bits 00 to 07
DM 6648 bits 08 to 11
DM 6648 bits 12 to 15
DM 6649 bits 00 to 07
DM 6649 bits 08 to 15
CPM1A
Not
supported
DM 6653 bits 08 to 11
DM 6653 bits 12 to 15
DM 6654 bits 00 to 07
DM 6654 bits 08 to 15
DM 6655 bits 12 to 15
Preparation for Operation
Follow the steps listed below when setting up a CPM2C system.
1, 2, 3...
1. System Design
• Select a CPM2C CPU Unit, Expansion Units, and Expansion I/O Units with
the specifications required in the controlled system.
• Design external fail-safe circuits such as interlock circuits and limit circuits.
Refer to 2-1 Specifications and 3-1 Design Precautions for details.
2. Installation
• Connect the Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units.
• Install the CPU Unit. (DIN-track installation)
Refer to 3-3 Installing the CPM2C and 3-4 Wiring and Connections for details.
3. Wiring
• Wire the power supply and I/O devices.
• Connect communications devices if necessary.
• Connect the Programming Console.
Refer to 3-4 Wiring and Connections, 4-3 Using a Programming Console,
for details.
4. Initial Settings
• Set the Communications Switches on the front of the CPU Unit, if necessary. (The switches must be set when a device other than the Programming Console is connected or the standard communications settings are
not used.)
• Connect the Programming Console, set the mode switch to PROGRAM
mode, and turn ON the PC.
27
Preparation for Operation
Section
1-6
• Check the CPU Unit’s LED indicators and the Programming Console’s display.
• Clear the PC’s memory. (All Clear)
• Make PC Setup settings.
Refer to 3-3 Installing the CPM2C and 4-3-4 Preparation for Operation for
details.
5. Create Ladder Program
• Create a ladder program to control the system.
Refer to Section 4 Using Programming Devices and the Programming
Manual for details.
6. Write Ladder Program in PC
• Write the ladder program in the PC with the Programming Console or
transfer the program to the PC from the Support Software.
Refer to Section 4 Using Programming Devices, to the SYSMAC Support
Software Operation Manuals and to the CPT User Manual for details.
7. Test Run
• Check I/O wiring in PROGRAM mode.
• Check and debug program execution in MONITOR mode.
Refer to Section 5 Test Runs and Error Processing for details.
28
SECTION 2
Unit Components and Specifications
This section describes the main components of the Units that go together to create a CPM2C PC and provides the technical
specifications of the Units.
2-1
2-2
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-3 AC Power Supply Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-4 I/O Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1 CPU Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-2 Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-3 CPM2C-MAD11 Analog I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-4 CPM2C-TS001/TS101 Temperature Sensor Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-5 CPM2C-SRT21 CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-6 CPM2C-CIF01 Peripheral/RS-232C Adapter Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-7 CPM2C-CIF11 RS-422/RS-232C Adapter Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-8 AC Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
30
30
33
34
40
40
45
51
52
53
54
55
58
29
Section
Specifications
2-1
2-1
Specifications
2-1-1 General Specifications
CPU Units with 10 I/O points
Item
Relay outputs
Transistor outputs
CPU Units
with
20 I/O points
transistor
outputs
Expansion I/O Units and
Expansion Units
Supply voltage
24 VDC
Operating voltage
range
Power consumption
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Inrush current
25 A max.
Insulation
resistance
Dielectric strength
20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) between insulated circuits
Noise immunity
Conforms to IEC61000-4-4; 2 kV (power lines)
Vibration resistance
10 to 57 Hz, 0.075-mm double amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz, acceleration: 9.8 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z
directions for 80 minutes each (Time coefficient; 8 minutes × coefficient factor 10 = total time 80
minutes)
Shock resistance
147 m/s2 three times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Ambient
temperature
Humidity
Operating: 0 to 55°C
Storage: –20 to 75°C (except for the battery)
10% to 90% (with no condensation)
Atmosphere
Must be free from corrosive gas
Power interrupt time
2 ms min.
4W
CPM2C-10EDR:
CPM2C-8ER:
CPM2C-24EDTC:
CPM2C-24EDT1C
CPM2C-8/16EDC:
CPM2C-8ETC:
CPM2C-8ET1C:
CPM2C-16ETC:
CPM2C-16ET1C:
CPM2C-MAD11:
CPM2C-TS001:
CPM2C-TS101:
CPM2C-SRT21:
1W
2W
1W
1W
1W
1W
1W
1W
1W
3.5 W
1.5 W
1.5 W
1W
1,500 VAC for 1 min (between insulated circuits)
2-1-2 Characteristics
CPU Unit Specification
Item
Control method
10 I/O points
(Relay outputs)
Stored program method
I/O control method
Cyclic scan with direct output (Immediate refreshing can be performed with IORF(97).)
Programming language
Ladder diagram
Instruction length
1 step per instruction, 1 to 5 words per instruction
Instructions
Basic instructions:
Special instructions:
Basic instructions:
Special instructions:
4,096 words
Execution time
Program capacity
Max. I/O CPU Unit only
10 points
capacity With Expansion 130 points max.
I/O Units and
Expansion
Units
30
10 I/O points
(Transistor outputs)
20 I/O points
(Transistor outputs)
14
105 instructions, 185 variations
0.64 µs (LD instruction)
7.8 µs (MOV instruction)
20 points
140 points max.
Section
Specifications
Item
Input bits
CPU Unit Specification
10 I/O points
10 I/O points
20 I/O points
(Relay outputs)
(Transistor outputs)
(Transistor outputs)
IR 00000 to IR 00915 (Words not used for input bits can be used for work bits.)
Output bits
IR 01000 to IR 01915 (Words not used for output bits can be used for work bits.)
Work bits
928 bits: IR 02000 to IR 04915 and IR 20000 to IR 22715
Special bits (SR area)
448 bits: SR 22800 to SR 25515
Temporary bits (TR area)
8 bits (TR0 to TR7)
Holding bits (HR area)
320 bits: HR 0000 to HR 1915 (Words HR 00 to HR 19)
Auxiliary bits (AR area)
384 bits: AR 0000 to AR 2315 (Words AR 00 to AR 23)
Link bits (LR area)
256 bits: LR 0000 to LR 1515 (Words LR 00 to LR 15)
Timers/Counters
256 timers/counters (TIM/CNT 000 to TIM/CNT 255)
Data memory
2-1
1-ms timers: TMHH(––)
10-ms timers: TIMH(15)
100-ms timers: TIM
1-s/10-s timers: TIML(––)
Decrementing counters: CNT
Reversible counters: CNTR(12)
Read/Write: 2,048 words (DM 0000 to DM 2047)*
Read-only: 456 words (DM 6144 to DM 6599)
PC Setup: 56 words (DM 6600 to DM 6655)
*The Error Log is contained in DM 2000 to DM 2021.
Interrupt processing
2 interrupts
2 interrupts
4 interrupts
Shared by the external interrupt inputs (counter mode) and the quick-response inputs.
Interval timer interrupts
1 (Scheduled Interrupt Mode or Single Interrupt Mode)
High-speed counter
One high-speed counter: 20 kHz single-phase or 5 kHz two-phase (linear count method)
Counter interrupt: 1 (set value comparison or set-value range comparison)
Interrupt Inputs
(Counter mode)
2 inputs
2 inputs
4 inputs
Shared by the external interrupt inputs and the quick-response inputs.
Pulse output
Two points with no acceleration/deceleration, 10 Hz to 10 kHz each, and no direction
control.
One point with trapezoid acceleration/deceleration, 10 Hz to 10 kHz, and direction control.
Two points with variable duty-ratio outputs.
(Pulse outputs can be used with transistor outputs only, they cannot be used with relay
outputs.)
Synchronized pulse
control
One point:
A pulse output can be created by combining the high-speed counter with pulse outputs and
multiplying the frequency of the input pulses from the high-speed counter by a fixed factor.
(This output is possible with transistor outputs only, it cannot be used with relay outputs.)
Quick-response inputs
Input time constant
(ON response time =
OFF response time)
2 inputs
2 inputs
4 inputs
Shared by the external interrupt inputs and the interrupt inputs (counter mode).
Min. input pulse width: 50 µs max.
Can be set for all input points.
(1 ms, 2 ms, 3 ms, 5 ms, 10 ms, 20 ms, 40 ms, or 80 ms)
Clock function
Shows the year, month, day of the week, day, hour, minute, and second. (Battery backup)
The following CPU Units have a built-in clock: CPM2C-10C1DR-D, CPM2C-10C1DTC-D,
CPM2C-10C1DT1C-D, CPM2C-20C1DTC-D, and CPM2C-20C1DT1C-D.
Communications functions
A CPM2C-CN111, CS1W-CN114, or CS1W-CN118 Connecting Cable is required to
connect to the CPM2C’s communications port. The communications port can be used as
both a peripheral and RS-232C port.
Peripheral port:
Supports Host Link, peripheral bus, no-protocol, or Programming Console connections.
RS-232C port:
Supports Host Link, no-protocol, 1:1 Slave Unit Link, 1:1 Master Unit Link, or 1:1 NT Link
connections.
31
Section
Specifications
Item
Functions provided by
Expansion Units
Memory protection
(See notes 1 and 2.)
Memory backup
(See notes 1 and 2.)
CPU Unit Specification
10 I/O points
10 I/O points
(Relay outputs)
(Transistor outputs)
Analog I/O Unit: Provides 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output.
2-1
20 I/O points
(Transistor outputs)
Temperature Sensor Unit: Provides up to 8 thermocouple or platinum resistance
thermometer inputs.
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit: Provides 8 inputs and 8 outputs as a CompoBus/S Slave.
HR area, AR area, program contents, read/write DM area contents, and counter values
maintained during power interruptions.
Flash memory:
Program, read-only DM area, and PC Setup
Memory backup:
The read/write DM area, HR area, AR area, and counter values are backed up.
CPU Unit with clock (battery): 2-year lifetime at 25°C
CPU Unit without clock (capacitor): 10-day backup at 25°C
CPU Unit without clock (lithium battery): 5-year lifetime at 25°C
Self-diagnostic functions
CPU Unit failure (watchdog timer), I/O bus error, battery error, and memory failure
Program checks
No END instruction, programming errors (checked when operation is started)
Note
32
1. The DM area, HR area, AR area, and counter values are backed up. If the
backup battery or capacitor is discharged, the contents of these areas will
be lost and the data values will revert to the defaults.
2. The contents of the program area, read-only DM area (DM 6144 to
DM 6599), and PC Setup (DM 6600 to DM 6655) are stored in flash
memory. The contents of these areas will be read from flash memory the
next time the power is turned ON, even if the backup battery or capacitor is
discharged.
When data has been changed in any of these areas, write the new values to
flash memory by switching the CPM2C to MONITOR or RUN mode, or by
turning the power OFF and then ON again.
Section
Specifications
2-1
2-1-3 AC Power Supply Unit Specifications
Item
Specification
Rating
24 VDC, 600 mA
Efficiency
Input conditions
75% min. (at rated output)
Overvoltage protection
100 to 240 VAC
47 to 63 Hz
85 to 264 VAC
0.4 A
0.2 A
0.5 mA max. (at rated output)
1 mA max. (at rated output)
15 A (at 25°C cold start)
30 A (at 25°C cold start)
10%/–15% (including input, load, and temperature fluctuations)
30 mA
2% (p-p) max.
0.75% max.
4% max.
0.05%/°C max.
300 ms max. (at input voltage of 100 VAC or 200 VAC and the rated
output)
10 ms (at input voltage of 100 VAC or 200 VAC and the rated output)
Self-resetting, operates at 105% to 350% of the rated current,
suspended and independent operation
None
Ambient operating temperature
0 to 55°C
Ambient storage temperature
–20 to 75°C
Ambient operating humidity
10% to 90% (no condensation)
Dielectric strength
2,000 V for 1 min between all inputs and GR
Leakage current: 10 mA
Output
characteristics
Rated voltage
Frequency
Allowable voltage range
Current
100 V
200 V
Leakage
100 V
current
200 V
Inrush current
100 V
200 V
Output voltage accuracy
Minimum output current
Ripple noise voltage
Input fluctuation
Load fluctuation
Temperature fluctuation
Startup time
Output hold time
Overcurrent protection
3,000 V for 1 min between all inputs and all outputs
Leakage current: 10 mA
1,000 V for 1 min between all outputs and GR
Leakage current: 10 mA
Insulation resistance
Vibration resistance
100 MΩ min. at 500 VDC between all outputs and any input, and
between all outputs and GR
10 to 57 Hz, amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz, acceleration: 9.8 m/s2 in X, Y, and
Z directions for 80 minutes according
(Time coefficient: 8 minutes × coefficient factor 10 = total time 80 min.)
Shock resistance
147 m/s2 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Noise terminal voltage
FCC class A
33
Section
Specifications
2-1
2-1-4 I/O Specifications
CPU Unit Input Specifications
Item
Specification
+10%/
–15%
All
24 VDC
OFF voltage/current
IN00000 to IN00001
IN00002 to IN00006
IN00007 and up
IN00000 to IN00001
IN00002 to IN00006
IN00007 and up
IN00000 to IN00001
IN00002 and up
All
2.7 kΩ
3.9 kΩ (IN00002 to IN00004 for CPU Units with 10 I/O points)
4.7 kΩ (IN00005 for CPU Units with 10 I/O points)
8 mA typical
6 mA typical (IN00002 to IN00004 for CPU Units with 10 I/O points)
5 mA typical (IN00005 for CPU Units with 10 I/O points)
17 VDC min., 5 mA
14.4 VDC min., 3.5 mA
5.0 VDC max., 1.1 mA
ON delay
All
1 to 80 ms max. Default: 10 ms (See note.)
OFF delay
Circuit configuration
All
1 to 80 ms max. Default: 10 ms (See note.)
Input current
ON voltage/current
IN00000 to IN00001
IN
2.7 kΩ
1 kΩ
0.01
µF
Internal circuits
Input voltage
Input impedance
Inputs
COM
Input LED
IN
3.9 kΩ
Internal circuits
IN00002 to IN00006
(IN00002 to IN0004
for CPU Units with
10 I/O points)
820 Ω
COM
Input LED
IN
4.7 kΩ
Internal circuits
IN00007 and up
(IN00005 for CPU
Units with 10 I/O
points)
750 Ω
COM
Input LED
Note The input time constant can be set to 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 40, or 80 ms in the PC
Setup.
34
Section
Specifications
2-1
High-speed Counter Inputs
The following CPU Unit input bits can be used as high-speed counter inputs. The
maximum count frequency is 5 kHz in differential phase mode and 20 kHz in the
other modes.
Function
Input
IN00000
Differential phase
mode
A-phase pulse input
Pulse plus direction
input mode
Pulse input
Up/down input mode
Increment mode
Increment pulse input
Increment pulse input
IN00001
B-phase pulse input
Direction input
Decrement pulse input
Normal input
IN00002
Z-phase pulse input or hardware reset input
(IN00002 can be used as a normal input when it is not used as a high-speed counter input.)
The minimum pulse widths for inputs IN00000 (A-phase input) and IN00001 (Bphase input) are as follows:
Pulse plus direction input mode, Up/down input
mode, Increment mode
50 µs min.
Differential phase mode
100 µs min.
Phase A
12.5 µs 12.5 µs
min.
min.
Phase B
T1
T2
T3
T4
T1 T2 T3 T4 : 12.5 µs min.
The minimum pulse width for input IN00002 (Z-phase input) is as follows:
50 µs min.
Phase Z
500 µs min.
Interrupt Inputs
CPM2C PCs are equipped with inputs that can be used as interrupt inputs (interrupt input mode or counter mode) and quick-response inputs. The minimum
pulse width for these inputs is 50 µs.
In CPU Units with 10 I/O points, inputs IN00003 and IN00004 can be used as
interrupt inputs. In CPU Units with 20 I/O points, inputs IN00003 through
IN00006 can be used as interrupt inputs.
35
Section
Specifications
2-1
Expansion I/O Unit Input Specifications
Item
Specification
Input voltage
24 VDC +10%/–15%
Input impedance
4.7 kΩ
Input current
5 mA typical
ON voltage/current
14.4 VDC min., 3.5 mA
OFF voltage/current
5.0 VDC max., 1.1 mA
ON delay
1 to 80 ms max. Default: 10 ms (See note.)
OFF delay
1 to 80 ms max. Default: 10 ms (See note.)
Circuit configuration
IN
Internal circuits
4.7 kΩ
750 Ω
COM
Input LED
Note The input time constant can be set to 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 40, or 80 ms in the PC
Setup.
36
Section
Specifications
2-1
CPU Unit and Expansion I/O Unit Output Specifications
Relay Outputs
Item
Specification
Max. switching capacity
2 A, 250 VAC (cosφ = 1)
2 A, 24 VDC
(4 A/common)
Min. switching capacity
10 mA, 5 VDC
Service life of relay
(See note.)
Electrical:
ON delay
15 ms max.
OFF delay
15 ms max.
Mechanical:
150,000 operations (24-VDC resistive load)
100,000 operations (240-VAC inductive load, cosφ = 0.4)
20,000,000 operations
Circuit configuration
OUT
Internal circuits
COM
OUT
COM
OUT
OUT
COM
Output
LED
Note The service life of relay output contacts shown in the table assumes the worst
conditions. The following graph shows the results of OMRON’s service life tests
at a switching rate of 1,800 times/hour.
Life (x 104)
120 VAC, resistive load
24 VDC, τ = 7 ms
120 VAC, cosφ = 0.4
240 VAC, cosφ = 0.4
24 VDC/240 VAC, resistive load
Switching rate: 1,800 times/hour
Contact current (A)
37
Section
Specifications
2-1
Transistor Outputs (Sinking or Sourcing)
Item
Specification
Max. switching capacity
(See note)
OUT01j00 to OUT01j07: 40 mA/4.5 VDC to 300 mA/20.4 VDC,
300 mA (20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC)
OUT01j08 to OUT01j15: 40 mA/4.5 VDC to 100 mA/20.4 VDC,
100 mA (20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC)
When using OUT01000 or OUT01001 as a pulse output, connect a dummy resistor as
required to bring the load current between 10 and 150 mA. If the load current is below
10 mA, the ON/OFF response time will be longer and high-speed pulses will not be output.
The transistor will heat if used at 150 mA or higher, possibly damaging elements.
Min. switching capacity
0.5 mA
Max. inrush current
0.9 A for 10 ms (charging and discharging waveform)
Leakage current
0.1 mA max.
Residual voltage
0.8 V max.
ON delay
OFF delay
OUT01000 and OUT01001:
OUT01002 and up:
OUT01000 and OUT01001:
Fuse
OUT01002 and up:
1 ms max.
1 fuse for each 2outputs (cannot be replaced by user)
20 µs max.
0.1 ms max.
40 µs max. 10 to 300 mA
0.1 ms max. 0.5 to 10 mA
Note The following graph shows the maximum switching capacity.
Output
current
(mA)
100/300
40
4.5
! Caution
38
20.4
26.4
Output
voltage
(V)
Do not apply voltage in excess of the maximum switching capacity to an output
terminal. It may result in damage to the product or fire.
Section
Specifications
Item
Specification
Sinking Outputs
24 VDC
Load
OUT
Load
Internal circuits
OUT
1A
Load
OUT
Load
OUT
COM (–)
Output LED
1A
Sourcing Outputs
COM (+)
1A
Load
OUT
OUT
Internal circuits
Circuit configuration
2-1
1A
OUT
OUT
Load
Load
Load
0 VDC
Output LED
39
Section
Unit Components
2-2
Unit Components
2-2-1 CPU Unit Components
CPU Unit Component Names
Front View: CPU Unit with Relay Outputs
4. PC status indicators
6. Output indicators
7. Communications port
5. Input indicators
8. Communications switches
2. Input terminals
3. Output terminals
Front View: CPU Unit with Transistor Outputs
4. PC status indicators
7. Communications port
6. Output indicators
5. Input indicators
8. Communications switches
2. Input connector
3. Output connector
Top View
Bottom View
9. Battery
1. Power supply
connector
10. Low battery detection switch
Right Side:
CPU Unit with Relay Outputs
Right Side:
CPU Unit with Transistor Outputs
11. Expansion I/O connector (output connector)
40
11. Expansion I/O connector
(output connector)
2-2
Section
Unit Components
2-2
CPU Unit Component Descriptions
1, 2, 3...
1. Power Supply Connector
Connect the power supply (24 VDC) to this connector.
2. Input Terminals/Connector
Connects the CPU Unit to external input devices.
3. Output Terminals/Connector
Connects the CPU Unit to external output devices.
4. PC Status Indicators
These indicators show the operating status of the PC, as shown in the following table.
Indicator
PWR
(green)
Status
Meaning
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Power is being supplied to the PC.
Power isn’t being supplied to the PC.
RUN
The PC is operating in RUN or MONITOR mode.
(green)
The PC is in PROGRAM mode or a fatal error has
occurred.
COMM
Flashing Data is being transferred via the communications
(yellow)
port (peripheral or RS-232C).
OFF
Data isn’t being transferred via communications port.
ERR/ALARM ON
A fatal error has occurred. (PC operation stops.)
(red)
Flashing A non-fatal error has occurred. (PC operation
continues.)
OFF
Indicates normal operation.
PRO
ON
The CPU Unit is set for Programming Console
(green)
connection.
OFF
The CPU Unit is not set for Programming Console
connection.
5. Input Indicators
The input indicators are lit when the corresponding input terminal is ON. The
status of an input indicator will reflect the status of the input even when that
input is being used for a high-speed counter.
Note a) When interrupt inputs are used in interrupt input mode, the indicator may not light even when the interrupt condition is met if the input is not ON long enough.
b) Input indicators will reflect the status of the corresponding inputs
even when the PC is stopped, but the corresponding input bits will
not be refreshed.
6. Output Indicators
The output indicators are lit when the corresponding output terminal is ON.
The indicators are lit during I/O refreshing. The status of an output indicator
will also reflect the status of the corresponding output when the output is being used as a pulse output.
7. Communications Port
Connects the PC to a Programming Device (including Programming
Consoles), host computer, or standard external device. Use a proper Connecting Cable (CPM2C-CN111, CS1W-CN114, or CS1W-CN118).
Note a) A C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console can be connected directly to the PC with a CS1W-CN224/CN624 Connecting Cable.
b) Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114 Connecting Cable to connect to the communications port as a peripheral port. The communications port can be used simultaneously as both a peripheral
port and RS-232C port by using the CPM2C-CN111 Connecting
Cable.
41
Section
Unit Components
2-2
c) Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN118 Connecting Cable to connect to the communications port as a RS-232C port. The communications port can be used simultaneously as both a peripheral
port and RS-232C port by using the CPM2C-CN111 Connecting
Cable
8. Communications Switches
The Communications Switches control the communications settings for the
communications port (peripheral port and RS-232C port). (The standard
settings are 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, and 9,600 bps
baud rate.)
Switch
settings
Peripheral port communications
RS-232C port
communications
SW1 SW2
OFF OFF Programming Console connection
OFF ON
Other Programming Device:
The settings in the PC Setup
(DM 6650 to DM 6654) are used.
The settings in the PC
Setup (DM 6645 to
DM 6649) are used.
ON
ON
The standard settings are
used.
OFF
ON
Programming Console connection
Other Programming Device:
The standard settings are used.
Be sure that Communications Switch 2 is OFF when connecting a Programming
Console. The green PRO indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will be lit.
9. Battery
This battery backs up memory in CPU Units with an internal clock. The battery is connected when the Unit is shipped.
Note A battery is not included in CPU Units without an internal clock, but a
CPM2C-BAT01 Battery can be purchased separately and connected
to backup memory.
10. Low Battery Detection Switch
This switch enables or disables the detection of a low-battery error. When a
battery is not connected, disable low-battery detection by sliding the switch
back (toward the battery).
Switch position
Low-battery detection
Forward (away from battery) Error detection enabled
Back (toward battery)
Error detection disabled
Disabled
Enabled
11. Expansion I/O Connector
Connects the PC’s CPU Unit to an Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit. Up
to 5 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units can be connected to a CPU
Unit. A cover for the expansion I/O connector is included with the CPU Unit.
42
Section
Unit Components
2-2
I/O Terminal and Connector Pin Allocation
CPU Unit with 10 I/O Points and Relay Outputs
Inputs Outputs
Shared common
CPU Unit with 10 I/O Points and Transistor Outputs
Inputs
Outputs
Sinking
Sourcing
43
Section
Unit Components
CPU Unit with 20 I/O Points
Inputs
Outputs
Sinking
44
Sourcing
2-2
Section
Unit Components
2-2
2-2-2 Expansion I/O Units
Expansion I/O Unit Components
Front View
Expansion I/O Units with Relay Outputs
3. Input indicators
4. Output indicators
Expansion I/O Units with Transistor Outputs
3. Input indicators
4. Output indicators
5. Expansion I/O
connector (input)
5. Expansion I/O
connector (input)
1. Input terminals
or
2. Output terminals
2. Output
terminals
1. Input connector
2. Output connector
Expansion I/O Units with Transistor Outputs Only and
Expansion I/O Units with Inputs Only
3. Input indicators
or
4. Output indicators
1. Input connector
or
2. Output connector
Right Side
Expansion I/O Units with
Relay Outputs
Expansion I/O Units with
Transistor Outputs and
Expansion I/O Units with
Inputs Only
7. Locking lever
6. Expansion I/O
connector (output)
7. Locking lever
1, 2, 3...
7. Locking lever
6. Expansion I/O
connector (output)
7. Locking lever
1. Input Terminals/Connector
Connects the CPU Unit to external input devices.
2. Output Terminals/Connector
Connects the CPU Unit to external output devices.
45
Unit Components
Section
2-2
3. Input Indicators
The input indicators are lit when the corresponding input terminal is ON.
Note Input indicators will reflect the status of the corresponding inputs
even when the PC is stopped, but the corresponding input bits will not
be refreshed.
4. Output Indicators
The output indicators are lit when the corresponding output terminal is ON.
5. Expansion I/O Connector (Input)
Connects the Expansion I/O Unit to the CPU Unit or the previous Expansion
Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
Note The indicators are lit during I/O refreshing. The status of an output indicator will also reflect the status of the corresponding output when
the output is being used as a pulse output.
6. Expansion I/O Connector (Output)
Connects the Expansion I/O Unit to the next Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit, if necessary. Up to 5 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units can
be connected to a CPU Unit. Only 10 words, however, can be allocated for
input and output.
A cover for the expansion I/O connector is not included with the Expansion
I/O Unit. Use the cover included with the CPU Unit to cover the unused
expansion I/O connector on the last Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit in
the PC.
7. Locking Lever
Used for securing Expansion I/O Units.
46
Section
Unit Components
2-2
I/O Terminal and Connector Pin Allocation
CPM2C-10EDR Expansion I/O Unit
Relay Outputs, 10 I/O Points
Inputs Outputs
7
1
OUT 0
IN 5
6
2
COM
IN 4
5
3
OUT 1
IN 3
4
4
COM
IN 2
3
5
OUT 2
IN 1
2
1
6
OUT 3
7
COM
COM
IN 0
Shared common
CPM2C-8ER Expansion I/O Unit
Relay Outputs, 8 Output Points
Outputs Outputs
Shared common
COM
7
1
OUT 3
6
2
COM
OUT 2
5
3
OUT 5
COM
4
4
COM
OUT 1
3
5
OUT 6
COM
2
6
OUT 7
OUT 0
1
7
COM
OUT 4
Shared common
47
Section
Unit Components
CPM2C-24EDTC/24EDT1C Expansion I/O Unit
Transistor Outputs, 24 I/O Points
Inputs
Outputs
Sinking
48
Sourcing
2-2
Section
Unit Components
2-2
CPM2C-8EDC Expansion I/O Unit
DC Inputs, 8 Input Points
Inputs
B
A
NC
12
12 NC
NC
11
11
NC
10
10 NC
NC
9
9
COM
NC
8
8
IN 7
NC
7
7
IN 6
NC
6
6
IN 5
NC
5
5
IN 4
NC
4
4
IN 3
NC
3
3
IN 2
NC
2
2
IN 1
NC
1
1
IN 0
NC
CPM2C-16EDC Expansion I/O Unit
DC Inputs, 16 Input Points
Inputs
B
A
NC
12
12 NC
NC
11
11
10 NC
NC
NC
10
COM
9
9
COM
IN 15
8
8
IN 7
IN 14
7
7
IN 6
IN 13
6
6
IN 5
IN 12
5
5
IN 4
IN 11
4
4
IN 3
IN 10
3
3
IN 2
IN 9
2
2
IN 1
IN 8
1
1
IN 0
49
Section
Unit Components
CPM2C-8ETC/8ET1C Expansion I/O Units
Transistor Outputs, 8 Output Points
Outputs
A
B
A
B
OUT 0
1
1 NC
OUT 0
1
1
NC
OUT 1
2
2 NC
OUT 1
2
2
NC
OUT 2
3
3 NC
OUT 2
3
3
NC
OUT 3
4
4 NC
OUT 3
4
4
NC
OUT 4
5
5 NC
OUT 4
5
5
NC
OUT 5
6
6 NC
OUT 5
6
6
NC
OUT 6
7
7 NC
OUT 6
7
7
NC
OUT 7
8
8 NC
OUT 7
8
8
NC
COM (–)
9
9 NC
9
9
NC
0 V 10
10 NC
0 V 10
10 NC
NC
11
11 NC
NC
11
11 NC
NC
12
12 NC
NC
12
12 NC
COM (+24 V)
CPM2C-16ETC/16ET1C Expansion I/O Unit
Transistor Outputs, 16 Output Points
Outputs
Sinking
A
A
B
OUT 0
1
1
OUT 8
OUT 0
1
1
OUT 8
OUT 1
2
2
OUT 9
OUT 1
2
2
OUT 9
OUT 2
3
3
OUT 10
OUT 2
3
3
OUT 10
OUT 3
4
4
OUT 11
OUT 3
4
4
OUT 11
OUT 4
5
5
OUT 12
OUT 4
5
5
OUT 12
OUT 5
6
6
OUT 13
OUT 5
6
6
OUT 13
OUT 6
7
7
OUT 14
OUT 6
7
7
OUT 14
OUT 7
8
8
OUT 15
OUT 7
8
8
OUT 15
9
COM (–)
COM (+24 V)
COM (–)
50
Sourcing
B
9
24 V
10
NC
11
10 24 V
11 NC
NC
12
12 NC
9
9
0 V 10
10
0V
NC
11
11
NC
NC
12
12
NC
COM (+24 V)
2-2
Section
Unit Components
2-2
2-2-3 CPM2C-MAD11 Analog I/O Unit
Front View
Right Side
5. Locking lever
3. Expansion I/O
connector (input)
4. Expansion I/O
connector (output)
2. DIP switch
5. Locking lever
1. Analog I/O terminals
1, 2, 3...
1. Analog I/O Terminals
Connect the CPU Unit to analog input and analog output devices.
2. DIP Switch
Used to switch between voltage and current input, and to perform average
processing.
ON
1
Average processing for analog input 0
(OFF: Average processing not performed; ON: Average processing performed)
2
Average processing for analog input 1
(OFF: Average processing not performed; ON: Average processing performed)
3
Input type for analog input 0
(OFF: Voltage input; ON: Current input)
4
Input type for analog input 1
(OFF: Voltage input; ON: Current input)
3. Expansion I/O Connector (Input)
Connects the Analog I/O Unit to the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit.
4. Expansion I/O Connector (Output)
Connects the Analog I/O Unit to the next Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion
Unit, if necessary. Up to 5 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units can be
connected to a CPU Unit. Only 10 words, however, can be allocated for input
and output respectively.
A cover for the expansion I/O connector is not included with the Expansion
Unit. Use the cover included with the CPU Unit to cover the unused expansion I/O connector on the last Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit in the
PC.
5. Locking Lever
Used for securing Expansion Units.
51
Section
Unit Components
2-2
2-2-4 CPM2C-TS001/TS101 Temperature Sensor Units
Front View
Right Side
CPM2C-TS001
6. Locking lever
4. Expansion I/O connector (input)
5. Expansion I/O connector (output)
Cold junction compensator
2. DIP switch
3. Rotary switch
6. Locking lever
1. Temperature input terminals
CPM2C-TS101
4. Expansion I/O connector (input)
2. DIP switch
3. Rotary switch
1. Temperature input terminals
1, 2, 3...
1. Temperature Input Terminals
Connect to a thermocouple or a platinum resistance thermometer.
2. DIP Switch
Sets the temperature unit (°C or °F) and the number of decimal places used.
Temperature unit for temperature input 0
OFF: °C; ON: °F
Number of decimal places used
OFF: Normal (0 or 1); ON: 2
3. Rotary Switch
Sets the temperature range.
CPM2C-TS001
Set value
0
1
2
3
4 to F
52
Thermocouple
K
J
---
Range (°C)
–200 to 1,300
0.0 to 500.0
–100 to 850
0.0 to 400.0
Setting not possible
Range (°F)
–300 to 2,300
0.0 to 900.0
–100 to 1,500
0.0 to 750.0
Section
Unit Components
2-2
CPM2C-TS101
Set value
Platinum
resistance
thermometer
Range (°C)
Range (°F)
0
Pt100
–200.0 to 650.0
–300.0 to 1,200.0
1
JPt100
–200.0 to 650.0
–300.0 to 1,200.0
2 to F
---
Setting not possible
4. Expansion I/O Connector (Input)
Connects the Temperature Sensor Unit to the CPU Unit or the previous Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit.
5. Expansion I/O Connector (Output)
Connects the Temperature Sensor Unit to the next Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit, if necessary. Up to 5 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units
can be connected to a CPU Unit. Only 10 words, however, can be allocated
for input and output.
A cover for the expansion I/O connector is not included with the Expansion
Unit. Use the cover included with the CPU Unit to cover the unused expansion I/O connector on the last Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit in the
PC.
6. Locking Lever
Used for securing Expansion Units.
2-2-5 CPM2C-SRT21 CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit
Front View
Right Side
6. Locking lever
3. LED indicators
4. Expansion I/O connector (input)
5. Expansion I/O connector (output)
2. DIP switch
1. CompoBus/S terminals
6. Locking lever
1, 2, 3...
1. CompoBus/S Terminals
Include the CompoBus/S communications data high/low terminal, and NC
terminals. Power is supplied to the Unit internally.
2. DIP Switch
The DIP switch sets the Unit’s node address, sets the communications
mode, and determines whether or not the outputs will be cleared in the event
of a communications error.
Pin(s)
Function
1 to 4
(labeled
1, 2, 4,
and 8)
These pins set the Unit’s node address using the DIP switch pins as
binary digits. (1 = ON)
DR
ON: Long-distance Communications Mode
OFF: High-speed Communications Mode
(See note.)
HOLD
ON: Retain inputs when a communications error occurs.
OFF: Clear inputs when a communications error occurs.
0: 0000
4: 0100
8: 1000
12: 1100
1: 0001
5: 0101
9: 1001
13: 1101
2: 0010
6: 0110
10: 1010
14: 1110
3: 0011
7: 0111
11: 1011
15: 1111
53
Section
Unit Components
2-2
Note The Long-distance Communications Mode can be used only when connected to
one of the following Master Units: C200HW-SRM21-V1, CQM1-SRM21-V1, or
SRM1-C0j-V2.
3. LED Indicators
These indicators show the status of CompoBus/S communications.
Indicator
COMM
(yellow)
ERR
(red)
Status
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Meaning
Communications in progress.
Communications error or stopped.
A communications error has occurred.
Indicates normal or no communications.
4. Expansion I/O Connector (Input)
Connects the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit to the CPU Unit or the previous Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit.
5. Expansion I/O Connector (Output)
Connects the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit to the next Expansion I/O Unit or
Expansion Unit, if necessary. Up to 5 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion
Units can be connected to a CPU Unit. Only 10 words, however, can be allocated for input and output respectively.
A cover for the expansion I/O connector is not included with the Expansion
Unit. Use the cover included with the CPU Unit to cover the unused expansion I/O connector on the last Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit in the
PC.
6. Locking Lever
Used for securing Expansion Units.
2-2-6 CPM2C-CIF01 Peripheral/RS-232C Adapter Unit
Front View
Do not use the CPM2C-CIF01 with any PC other than the CPM2C.
Do not connect another CPM2C-CIF01 or the CPM2C-CIF11 to the
CPM2C-CIF01. The CPM2C-CN111 can be connected to the
CPM2C-CIF01, but the peripheral port and the RS-232C port of the
CPM2C-CN111 cannot be used simultaneously. If an attempt to use
these ports simultaneously is made, communications will not be
performed properly, and this may result in malfunction of equipment.
1. Peripheral port
2. RS-232C port
3. Connector
1, 2, 3...
1. Peripheral Port
Used to connect to Programming Devices (including Programming
Consoles), host computers, or general-purpose external devices. Use a
special connecting cable (CS1W-CN114, CS1W-CN118) for connections.
Note a) The C200H-PRO27 Programming Console can be connected
directly to the CPM2C’s CPU Unit using a special connecting
cable (CS1W-CN224/624).
b) Use the CS1W-CN114 when using the port as a peripheral port.
c) Use the CS1W-CN118 when using the port as a RS-232C port.
54
Section
Unit Components
2-2
2. RS-232C Port
Used to connect to the RS-232C interface of a personal computer or Programmable Terminal (operator interface).
Connector Pin Allocation
Internal Configuration
Peripheral port
(CMOS/RS-232C)
CPM2C-CIF01
CPM2C CPU Unit
Peripheral port
(CMOS level)
CMOS level →
RS-232C conversion
RS-232C port
(RS-232C)
RS-232C port
(D-sub connector)
Peripheral port
on
CPM2C-CIF01
RS-232C port
on
CPM2C-CIF01
Signal
conversion
Outputs signals from the CPU Unit’s CMOS
interface without conversion, or converts CMOS
level (CPU Unit side) to RS-232C (connected
device side).
Function
Host Link, peripheral bus, no-protocol, or
Programming Console connections.
Outputs signals from the CPU Unit’s CMOS
interface without conversion.
Host Link, no-protocol, 1:1 Link, or 1:1 NT Link
connections.
Signal
conversion
Function
3. Connector
Connects to the communications port on the CPU Unit.
2-2-7 CPM2C-CIF11 RS-422/RS-232C Adapter Unit
Front View
Right Side
1. RS-422/485 port
3. Terminating resistance switch
2. RS-232C port
5. Connector
4. RS-485 interface switch
Note Do not use the CPM2C-CIF11 with any PC other than the CPM2C.
55
Section
Unit Components
1, 2, 3...
2-2
1. RS422/485 Port
Used to connect to host computers, or standard external devices.
Terminal Arrangement
RDA–
Receive data (input)
RDB+
SDA–
Send data (output)
SDB+
NC
Note The maximum line length is 500 m.
2. RS-232C Port
Used to connect to the RS-232C interface of a personal computer or Programmable Terminal (operator interface).
Connector Pin Arrangement
RS-422/485 Connection Example
CPM2C-CIF11
B500-AL004
Shield
Internal Configuration
RS-422/485 port
(terminal block)
RS-232C port
(D-sub connector)
56
CPM2C-CIF11
CMOS level →
RS-422 conversion
Connector hood
CPM2C CPU Unit
Peripheral port
(CMOS level)
RS-232C port
(RS-232C)
Section
Unit Components
RS-422/485
port on
CPM2C-CIF11
RS-232C port
on
CPM2C-CIF11
2-2
Signal
conversion
Converts CMOS level (CPU Unit side) to RS-422
(connected device side).
RS-422 (externally connected device) insulated
using DC/DC converter or photocoupler.
Function
Host Link, peripheral bus, or no-protocol
connections.
Signal
conversion
Function
Outputs signals from the CPU Unit’s CMOS
interface without conversion.
Host Link, no-protocol, 1:1 Link, or 1:1 NT Link
connections.
3. Terminating Resistance Switch
Set this switch to ON only for double-ended connection to a Host Link network. This switch is factory-set to OFF.
SW1
ON
OFF
4. RS-485 Interface Switch
Used to switch to the RS-485 interface, and to enable or disable RS/CS control when performing RS-485 communications.
SW2
Status
SW2-1
SW2-2
SW2-2
OFF
ON
SW2 Factory setting
1
OFF
2
OFF
3
ON
4
OFF
SW2–1
OFF
ON
4-wire comSetting not
munications
possible
Setting not
2-wire compossible
munications
SW2-3
SW2-4
SW2–3
SW2–4 OFF
ON
OFF
Setting not
possible
ON
Data can be
received at
any time
RS control
possible for
CPU Unit
Setting not
possible
Note Do not set both SW2-3 and SW2-4 to ON. Doing so may result in damage to
internal circuitry. Set SW2-3 to OFF and SW2-4 to OFF when performing
RS-485 2-wire communications.
57
Section
Unit Components
2-2
5. Connector
Connects to the communications port on the CPU Unit.
RS-422 Interface Block Diagram
2-2-8 AC Power Supply Unit
Front View
Bottom Side
1. Terminal block
2. LED indicator
1, 2, 3...
3. CPU Unit power supply connector
1. Terminal Block
Terminals for AC power supply input and service power supply (24 VDC).
2. LED Indicator
Lights when power is supplied.
3. CPU Unit Power Supply Connector
Use the connecting cable provided as an accessory to connect this connector to the power supply connector on the CPU Unit (24 VDC).
Note The ratings for the CPM2C-PA201 AC Power Supply Unit are 100 to
240 VAC input; 24 VDC/600 mA output. The maximum current that
can be supplied via the CPU Unit power supply connector and the
service power supply terminals on the terminal block is 600 mA.
58
SECTION 3
Installation and Wiring
This section provides information on installing and wiring a CPM2C PC. Be sure to follow the directions and precautions in
this section when installing the CPM2C in a panel or cabinet, wiring the power supply, or wiring I/O.
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
Design Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1 Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2 Power Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3 Interlock and Limit Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting an Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1 Installation Site Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-2 Panel/Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the CPM2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1 Connecting Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-2 CPM2C Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1 General Precautions for Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-2 Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-3 Using the AC Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-4 Removing and Wiring I/O Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-5 Removing and Wiring I/O Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-6 Using I/O Terminals and Relay Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-7 Connecting Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-8 Connecting Output Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-9 RS-422 Port Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-10 Programming Device Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-11 No-Protocol Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-12 OMRON PT Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-13 One-to-one PC Link Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-14 CompoBus/S I/O Link Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60
60
60
60
61
61
61
62
62
64
65
65
66
67
69
70
74
75
82
94
94
98
99
100
100
59
Section
Design Precautions
3-1
3-1
Design Precautions
Observe the following precautions when designing a system incorporating a
CPM2C PC.
3-1-1 Power Supply Wiring
Separate the power supply wiring from the control system, CPM2C system, and
DC I/O system wiring. Separate the control circuits that supply power to the main
Unit from the main circuits using dedicated circuit protectors and fuses.
3-1-2 Power Supply Voltage
! Caution
Use the power supply voltages indicated in Section 2 Unit Specifications and
Components. Failure to adhere to the specifications may result in fire.
If the power supply voltage falls below 85% of the rated voltage, the CPM2C will
stop and all outputs will be turned OFF. If low voltage affects the equipment, etc.,
provide a protection circuit which shuts OFF the output until the supply voltage
returns to the rated value.
In places where power supply conditions are poor, take steps to ensure that
power is supplied at the rated voltage. Be sure to adhere to safety precautions,
such as providing breakers to prevent short circuits in external wiring.
When conducting any of the following operations, turn OFF the power to the PC.
Electrocution, product damage and malfunction may result.
• Connecting or disconnecting Expansion I/O Units, Expansion Units, and CPU
Units.
• Assembling Units.
• Connecting cables and wiring.
• Connecting or disconnecting connectors.
• Replacing the battery.
3-1-3 Interlock and Limit Circuits
! WARNING Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits (i.e., not in the
Programmable Controller) to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality
occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor affecting the PC
operation. Not providing proper safety measures may result in serious
accidents.
The following diagram shows an example of an interlock circuit.
Interlock Circuit
01005
CPM2C
MC1
MC2
Motor forward
01006
MC2
MC1
Motor reverse
In the interlock circuit above, MC1 and MC2 can’t be ON at the same time even if
CPM2C outputs 01005 and 01006 are both ON (an incorrect PC operation).
60
Section
Selecting an Installation Site
3-2
3-2
Selecting an Installation Site
The CPM2C is resistant to harsh conditions and highly reliable, but installing the
PC in a favorable site will maximize its reliability and operating lifetime.
! Caution
Be sure to install the CPM2C correctly, as outlined in this manual. Failure to do
so may result in Unit malfunction.
3-2-1 Installation Site Conditions
Note Do not install the CPM2C under any of the following conditions.
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to a temperature below 0°C or over 55°C.
• Locations subject to a humidity below 10% or over 90%.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
Be sure that the conditions at the installation site conform to the CPM2C’s general specifications. Refer to 2-1-1 General Specifications for details.
Note Provide proper shielding when installing in the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other sources of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radiation.
• Locations near to power supply lines.
3-2-2 Panel/Cabinet Installation
Consider PC operation, maintenance, and surrounding conditions when installing the CPM2C in a panel or cabinet.
Overheating
The operating temperature range for the CPM2C is 0 to 55_C. Be sure that there
is adequate ventilation for cooling.
• Allow enough space for air circulation.
• Do not install the CPM2C above equipment that generates a large amount of
heat, such as heaters, transformers, or large resistors.
• Install a cooling fan or system when the ambient temperature exceeds 55_C.
Control panel
Fan
CPM2C
Air vent
61
Section
Installing the CPM2C
3-3
• Orient the CPM2C as shown below when installing it.
Top
Bottom
Electrical Noise
Power lines and high-voltage equipment can cause electrical noise in the PC.
• Do not install the CPM2C in a panel or cabinet with high-voltage equipment.
• Allow at least 200 mm between the CPM2C and nearby power lines.
200 mm min.
CPM2C
200 mm min.
Accessibility
Ensure that the CPM2C can be accessed for normal operation and maintenance.
• Provide a clear path to the CPM2C for operation and maintenance. High-voltage equipment or power lines could be dangerous if they are in the way during
routine operations.
• The PC will be easiest to access if the panel or cabinet is installed about 1 to
1.6 m above the floor.
• Separate the CPM2C by at least 100 mm from other devices.
Other
device
Other
device
100 mm min.
3-3
100 mm min.
Installing the CPM2C
This section describes how to install the CPM2C and connect Expansion Units
and Expansion I/O Units. Refer to Appendix B for diagrams showing the dimensions of the Units.
3-3-1 Connecting Units
Up to 5 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units can be connected to a CPM2C
CPU Unit. Use the following procedure when connecting an Expansion I/O Unit
or Expansion Unit.
62
Installing the CPM2C
1, 2, 3...
Section
3-3
1. Remove the cover from the CPU Unit’s or the last Expansion I/O Unit’s or
Expansion Unit’s expansion I/O connector. If the cover is difficult to remove,
use a flat-blade screwdriver to pry the cover from the expansion I/O connector.
Expansion I/O connector cover
2. Align the Unit and CPU Unit (or previous Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion
Unit) so that the catches (top and bottom) on the connectors fit together.
Press the Units together to connect them.
3. Lock the Units together by closing the locks (top and bottom) on the CPU
Unit (or previous Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit). Place the cover (included with the CPU Unit) on the last Unit’s expansion I/O connector.
Slide to lock
Units together.
Expansion I/O
connector cover
63
Section
Installing the CPM2C
3-3
3-3-2 CPM2C Installation
The CPM2C can be installed on a 35-mm DIN track.
DIN Track
PFP-100N (1 m)
PFP-50N (50 cm)
PFP-100N2 (1 m)
End Plates
(PFP-M)
Installation
Lower the CPM2C so that the notch on the back of the PC catches the top of the
DIN Track. Push the PC forward until the lock snaps into place.
2) Insert
onto track.
3) Push in on
the Unit.
1) Pull down.
! Caution
4) Lock
Be sure that the DIN Track is installed horizontally. Installing the Track vertically
will inhibit the airflow that cools the CPM2C and could cause overheating.
Removal
Pry the lock down with a flat-blade screwdriver and pivot the PC upward to
remove it.
Screwdriver
64
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
3-4
Wiring and Connections
This section provides basic information on wiring the Power Supply Unit and Expansion I/O Units, and on connecting Programming Devices.
3-4-1 General Precautions for Wiring
! Caution
Leave the protective label in place while wiring. The Unit may malfunction if
strands of wire get inside the Unit. After completing wiring be sure to remove the
label to avoid overheating.
Protective label
I/O Line Noise
Do not run CPM2C I/O lines in the same duct or conduit as power lines.
Hanging Ducts
Leave at least 300 mm between the power cables and the I/O or control wiring,
as shown in the following diagram.
CPM2C I/O lines
300 mm min.
Control cables and
CPM2C power lines
300 mm min.
Power cables
Floor Ducts
Leave at least 200 mm between the wiring and the top of the duct, as shown in
the following diagram.
Control cables and
CPM2C I/O lines CPM2C power lines Power cables
Metal plate (iron)
200 mm min.
65
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
Conduits
Separate the CPM2C I/O lines, power and control lines, and power cables, as
shown in the following diagram.
Control cables and
CPM2C I/O lines CPM2C power lines Power cables
3-4-2 Power Supply Wiring
The following procedure explains how to connect the CPU Unit to the AC Power
Supply Unit (CPM2C-PA201) with the power supply connector (included) to provide a 24-VDC power supply.
Power supply connector
(included with the Unit)
1, 2, 3...
1. Align the power supply connector with the socket on the bottom of the
CPM2C and insert the connector.
Red lead: +24 VDC
Black lead: 0 VDC
2. To remove the power supply connector, grasp the power supply connector
(not the wires), release the lock tab on the connector, and remove the connector.
Note
66
1. The CPM2C-PA201 is the recommended Power Supply Unit. When using
other power supplies, be sure to use a DC power supply with sufficient
capacity and low ripple.
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
2. Do not perform a voltage withstand test on the DC power supply terminals
on the CPU Unit. The test might damage the PC’s internal components.
3. When the equipment must conform to the EC Directives (Low-voltage Directives), use a power supply with double insulation or reinforced insulation.
3-4-3 Using the AC Power Supply Unit
Crimp Terminals
Use crimp terminals to wire the AC Power Supply Unit (CPM2C-PA201). Do not
connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals.
• Use M3.5 terminal screws.
• Tighten the terminal screws securely to a torque of 0.74 to 0.9 NSm.
Use round terminals of the dimensions shown.
Round Terminal
6.2 mm max.
Recommended wire size: 0.3 to 1.65 mm2 (AWG 22 to 16)
To prevent electric shock resulting from malfunction due to factors such as
noise, connect to a ground of 100 Ω or less. When grounding, use a wire at least
1.25 mm2 thick.
Grounding
! WARNING Connect the ground terminal of the Power Supply Unit to a ground of 100 Ω or
less when installing the Unit. Not connecting to a ground of 100 Ω or less may
result in electric shock.
Ground of 100 Ω or less
+
–
Power Supply Wiring
• To prevent voltage drops caused by startup currents and inrush currents from
other devices, wire the power supply circuits of the CPM2C separately from
power line circuits.
• When using several CPM2C’s together, it is recommended that circuits are
wired separately in order to prevent circuit-breaker malfunctions and voltage
drops due to inrush current.
• Twist power supply lines to prevent noise from the power supply lines. Noise
can further be prevented by wiring via a 1:1 isolation transformer.
67
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
• Use wires at least 1.25 mm2 thick in order to allow for voltage drops and to keep
the current within the allowable level.
~
100 to 240 VAC
+
–
! WARNING Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to a torque
of 0.74 to 0.9 NSm. Loose screws may result in burning or malfunction.
The 24-VDC service power supply terminals on the terminal block can be used
for input power supply.
+
–
24 VDC
Can be used for input power supply.
Use the following to obtain the capacity of the service power supply that can be
used.
Example: CPU Unit + 5 Expansion I/O Units (1-W Power Consumption)
Power consumption = 4 (CPU Unit’s power consumption) + 1 (Expansion I/O
Unit’s power consumption) × 5 (No. of Expansion I/O Units) = 9 (W)
Service power supply current = (14.4 (CPM2C-PA201’s rated capacity) – 9
(power consumption)) ÷ 24 (V) = 208 (mA)
! WARNING If the 24-VDC output (either the service power supply or the power supply to the
CPU Unit) is overloaded, or is short-circuited, the voltage will drop, and the
output will turn OFF. Take external countermeasures to ensure the safety of the
system in such an event. Failure to do so may result in a serious accident.
! WARNING Do not connect a power supply to the service power supply terminals. If an AC
power supply is mistakenly connected to these terminals, the internal circuitry
will be damaged.
68
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
3-4-4 Removing and Wiring I/O Terminal Blocks
The following tables provide I/O terminal block specifications.
I/O terminal blocks
Terminal Block
Specifications
Item
Recommended Wire and
Terminals
Specification
Screw size
M2
Recommended tightening torque
0.22 to 0.25 NSm
Item
Specification
mm2
Solid wire
0.14 to 1.5
Stranded wire
(See notes.)
Pin terminal
0.14 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG 28 to AWG 16) (Strip 7 mm.)
(AWG 28 to AWG 16) (Strip 7 mm.)
0.25 to 1.5 mm2, 7-mm terminal length
Recommended pin terminals
Phoenix AI0.25-8Y; Applicable wire size: 0.2 to 0.25 mm2
Phoenix AI0.34-8TQ; Applicable wire size: 0.25 to 0.34 mm2
Phoenix AI0.5-8WH; Applicable wire size: 0.34 to 0.50 mm2
Phoenix AI-TWIN2×0.5-8WH: Applicable wire size: 2×0.50 mm2
Note
1. When using stranded wire, be sure to avoid stray wire strands that might
short-circuit an adjacent terminal.
2. Do not solder the ends of stranded wires. Solder can break and cause wiring
problems. Also, the solder can cause corrosion on the contact surface.
Removing and Wiring a
Terminal Block
1, 2, 3...
Use the following procedure when wiring a terminal block.
1. Loosen the screws at the top and bottom of the terminal block as shown in
the following diagram.
69
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
2. Pull the terminal block out of the Unit.
3. Insert each lead wire into the terminal block and tighten that terminal’s
screw.
4. After wiring the terminal block, insert the block into the Unit and tighten the
screws at the top and bottom of the terminal block.
3-4-5 Removing and Wiring I/O Connectors
The following tables provide specifications of compatible I/O connectors.
I/O connectors
70
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
Compatible Connector Specifications (OMRON)
Connector
Specifications
Model number
24-pin soldered
Connector: Fujitsu FCN-361J024-AU equivalent
connector and cover Cover: Fujitsu FCN-360C024-J2 equivalent
C500-CE241
24-pin crimp
Housing: Fujitsu FCN-363J024 equivalent
connector and cover Contacts: Fujitsu FCN-363J-AU equivalent
Cover: Fujitsu FCN-360C024-J2 equivalent
C500-CE242
24-pin pressure
connector
C500-CE243
Connector: Fujitsu FCN-367J024-AU/F equivalent
Connector Specifications (Fujitsu)
Item
Specifications
Soldered jack
Crimp
Crimp jack housing
connector
Crimp contacts
Pressure
connector
Hand crimp tool
Contact removal tool
Pressure jack with closed
end cover
Pressure jack with open end
cover
Pressing
tools
Hand press
Cable cutter
Locator plate
Connector cover
(Not compatible with the closed-end cover
pressure jack.)
Connecting I/O Connectors
(Pressure Connectors)
1, 2, 3...
Model number
24-pin gold-plated terminals
FCN-361J024-AU
24-pin
For wire gauges 24 AWG to 28 AWG
----24-pin gold-plated terminals
24-pin silver-plated terminals
24-pin gold-plated terminals
24-pin silver-plated terminals
General purpose
General purpose
For the 360-series connectors
Thin slanted cover for 24-pin connector
With slotted screws for 24-pin connector
(Can be turned by hand.)
With Phillips-head screws for 24-pin connector
With intermediate Phillips-head screws for 24-pin
connector
FCN-363J024
FCN-363J-AU
FCN-363T-T005/H
FCN-360T-T001/H
FCN-367J024-AU/F
FCN-367J024-AG/F
FCN-367J024-AU/H
FCN-367J024-AG/H
FCN-707T-T101/H
FCN-707T-T001/H
FCN-367T-T012/H
FCN-360C024-J2
FCN-360C024E
FCN-360C024B
FCN-360C024C
Use the following procedure when connecting a pressure connector.
1. Align the connector and insert it into the Unit.
71
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
2. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to tighten the connector’s fastening screws.
Flat-blade screwdriver
Connecting I/O Connectors
(Soldered Connectors)
1, 2, 3...
Use the following procedure when connecting a soldered connector.
1. Align the connector and insert it into the Unit.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the connector’s fastening screws.
Phillips screwdriver
Assembling Soldered
Connectors
1, 2, 3...
Use the following procedure when wiring and assembling a soldered connector
(OMRON C500-CE241).
1. Slide heat-shrink tubing over the power supply wires and solder the wires to
the appropriate pins on the socket.
Heat-shrink tubing
Power supply wires
Connector
72
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
2. After soldering all of the pins, slide the heat-shrink tubing over the soldered
power supply pins and shrink the tubing by heating it with a heat gun.
Heat-shrink tubing
3. Assemble the socket and connector as shown in the following diagram.
Connector cover
Socket
Nuts (3)
Small screws (3)
Small screws (2)
Cable clamp
Connector screws
Nuts (2)
73
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
3-4-6 Using I/O Terminals and Relay Terminals
We recommend using the following I/O Terminals and Relay Terminals to wire
devices to the CPM2C’s I/O connector.
Note The allowable current for
the XW2Z-jjjA is 1 A.
Do not allow the current on
the common terminal to
exceed 1 A.
Outputs
Inputs
Cables (See note.)
XW2Z-jjjA
G79-jjjC
Cables (See note.)
XW2Z-jjjA
Cables
G79-jjjC
Cables (See note.)
XW2Z-jjjA
G79-jjjC
Cables
G79-jjjC
Cables
G79-jjjC
G2R-1-S(N)
74
Terminal Blocks
XW2B-20G4 (M3 screws)
XW2B-20G5 (M3.5 screws)
Terminal Blocks
XW2C-20G5-IN16 (M3.5 screws)
Relay Terminals
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-IA16
Terminal Blocks
XW2B-20G4 (M3 screws)
XW2B-20G5 (M3.5 screws)
Relay Terminals
G7TC-OC08
Relay Terminals
G7OA-ZOC16-3
G7OA-ZOC16-4
Relay Terminals
G7OD-OC16
G7OD-OC16-1
G7OD-SOC16
G7OD-SOC16-1
G7OD-FOM16
G7OD-FOM16-1
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
3-4-7 Connecting Input Devices
Wire inputs to the CPM2C’s CPU Unit and Expansion I/O Units as shown in the
following diagrams.
Note When equipment must conform to the EC Directives (Low-voltage Directives),
use a power supply with double insulation or reinforced insulation.
Input Configuration
The following diagrams show the input configurations.
CPU Units with 10 I/O Points, Relay Outputs
(CPM2C-10CDR-D/10C1DR-D)
Input terminals
24 VDC
Input devices
CPU Units with 10 I/O Points, Transistor Outputs
(CPM2C-10CDTC-D/10CDT1C-D/10C1DTC-D/10C1DT1C-D)
Input connector
24 VDC
Input devices
75
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
CPU Units with 20 I/O Points, Transistor Outputs
(CPM2C-20CDTC-D/20C1DTC-D/20C1DTC-D/20C1DT1C-D)
Input connector
24 VDC
B
A
12
12
11
11
10
10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
COM
00011
00010
00009
00008
Input devices
COM
00007
00006
00005
00004
00003
00002
00001
00000
Input devices
Note COM terminals (A9 to B9) are connected internally.
Expansion I/O Unit with 10 I/O Points, Relay Outputs (CPM2C-10EDR)
24 VDC
Input terminals
COM
00j05
00j04
00j03
00j02
00j01
00j00
Input devices
Expansion I/O Units with 24 I/O Points, Transistor Outputs
(CPM2C-24EDTC/24EDT1C)
Input connector
24 VDC
COM
00j15
00j14
00j13
00j12
00j11
00j10
00j09
00j08
Input devices
B
A
12
12
11
11
10
10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
COM
00j07
00j06
00j05
00j04
00j03
00j02
00j01
00j00
Input devices
Note COM terminals (A9 to B9) are connected internally.
76
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
Expansion I/O Unit with 8 Input Points
(CPM2C-8EDC)
Input connector
B
A
12
12
11
11
10
10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
24 VDC
COM
00j07
00j06
00j05
00j04
00j03
00j02
00j01
00j00
Input devices
Expansion I/O Unit with 16 Input Points
(CPM2C-16EDC)
Input connector
24 VDC
COM
00j15
00j14
00j13
00j12
00j11
00j10
00j09
00j08
Input devices
B
A
12
12
11
11
10
10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
COM
00j07
00j06
00j05
00j04
00j03
00j02
00j01
00j00
Input devices
Note COM terminals (A9 to B9) are connected internally.
77
Section
Wiring and Connections
Wiring Input Terminals
The wiring for input terminals is as shown below.
Terminal Blocks: XW2B-20G4, XW2B-20G5
Connecting Cable: XW2Z-jjjA
NC
COM
00j07
00j06
00j05
00j04
00j03
00j02
00j01
00j00
19
17
15
13
11
9
Connecting Cable: G79-jC
20
18
16
14
12
10
7
8
6
5
3
4
1
2
NC
COM
00j00
00j08
00j09
00j15
00j10
00j14
00j11
00j13
00j12
00j12
00j13
00j11
00j14
00j10
00j15
00j09
00j08
COM
NC
19
17
15
13
11
20
18
16
14
12
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Terminal Block: XW2C-20G5-IN16
Relay Terminals: G7TC-ID16, G7TC-IA16
Connecting Cable: XW2Z-jjjA
Connecting Cable: G79-jC
00j15
33
31
29
27
34
32
30
28
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
78
00j15
C15 15
00j14
C14 14
C13 13
00j13
00j12
C12 12
00j11
C11 11
C10 10
C9 9
00j10
00j09
00j08
C8
8
00j07
C7
00j06
C6
7
6
00j05
5
00j04
C5
C4
00j03
C3
3
00j02
C2
2
00j01
C1
C0
1
00j00
4
0
– +
00j14
00j13
00j12
00j11
00j10
00j09
00j08
00j07
00j06
00j05
00j04
00j03
00j02
00j01
00j00
00j01
00j02
00j03
00j04
00j05
00j06
00j07
COM
NC
3-4
Section
Wiring and Connections
Input Devices
3-4
The following table shows how to connect various input devices.
Device
Circuit diagram
Relay output
IN
5 mA/6 mA/8 mA
CPM2C
COM (+)
NPN open collector
Sensor
power supply
Output
IN
CPM2C
5 mA/6 mA/8 mA
COM (+)
0V
NPN current output
Use the same power supply for
the input and sensor.
Constant
current
circuit
Output
IN
5 mA/6 mA/8 mA
CPM2C
+
COM (+)
0V
PNP current output
Sensor power
supply
5 mA/6 mA/8 mA
IN
CPM2C
Output
COM (–)
0V
Voltage output
COM (+)
Output
IN
CPM2C
0V
Sensor power
supply
Note Do not use the following wiring with voltage-output devices:
Incorrect Wiring
Sensor power
supply
Output
IN
CPM2C
0V
COM(+)
79
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
High-speed Counter Inputs
Using IR 00000 to IR 00002 as High-speed Counter Inputs
In these examples, Encoders with an external 24-VDC open-collector output are
connected.
Differential Phase Mode
(Count frequency: 5 kHz)
Pulse Plus Direction Input Mode
(Count frequency: 20 kHz)
CPM2C
CPM2C
00000 A-phase input
Encoder
00001 B-phase input
00002 Z-phase input
00000 Pulse input
Encoder
00001 Direction input
Sensor or switch
00002 Reset input
Sensor or switch
COM
COM
24 VDC
24 VDC
Up/Down Mode
(Count frequency: 20 kHz)
Increment Mode
(Count frequency: 20 kHz)
CPM2C
CPM2C
Encoder
Sensor
00000 CW input*
00000 Pulse input
00001 CCW input*
00001 Normal input
00002 Reset input
00002 Normal input
Sensor
Sensor or switch
COM
COM
24 VDC
24 VDC
Note *CW is clockwise and CCW is counter-clockwise.
Using IR 00003 to IR 00006 as Interrupt Inputs (Counter Mode)
In these examples, an Encoder with an external 24-VDC open-collector output is
connected.
Increment or decrement
(Count frequency: 2 kHz)
CPM2C
Input (00003 to 00006)
Encoder
COM
24 VDC
PC Setup Settings
The input bits shown in the following tables can operate as normal inputs or they
can be assigned special functions in the PC Setup.
Special functions for input bits IR 00000 through IR 00002 are set in DM 6642:
Bit
address
IR 00000
IR 00001
IR 00002
80
PC Setup setting (DM 6642 bits 08 to15)
00
Used as normal
inputs.
01
Used as high-speed
counter inputs.
02, 03, or 04
Used as inputs for
synchronized pulse
control.
Used as a normal input.
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
Special functions for input bits IR 00003 through IR 00006 are set in DM 6628:
Bit
address
Bits in
DM 6628
IR 00003
IR 00004
IR 00005
IR 00006
00 to 03
04 to 07
08 to 11*
12 to 15*
PC Setup setting (in DM 6628)
0
Used as normal
inputs.
1
Used as interrupt
inputs (including
counter mode).
2
Used as
quick-response
inputs.
Note *These inputs must be set as normal inputs (setting: 0) when a CPU Unit with 10
I/O points is being used.
High-speed Counter Input Connection Examples
Differential Phase Mode
(Count frequency: 5 kHz)
E6B2-CWZ6C
Encoder
(NPN open-collector output)
Pulse Plus Direction Input mode
(Count frequency: 20 kHz)
CPM2C
CPM2C
Black
White
Orange
E6A2-CS5C
Encoder
00000 A-phase input
00001 B-phase input
00001 Direction input
00002 Z-phase input
Sensor or
switch
Brown
Blue
COM
00002 Reset input
Sensor
power
COM
Sensor or
switch
24 VDC
Leakage Current
00000 Pulse input
24 VDC
A leakage current can cause false inputs when using 2-wire sensors (proximity
switches or photoelectric switches) or limit switches with LEDs. False inputs
won’t occur if the leakage current is less than 1.0 mA. If the leakage current
exceeds these values, insert a bleeder resistor in the circuit to reduce the input
impedance, as shown in the following diagram.
Input power
supply
R
Bleeder
resistor
CPM2C
2-wire sensor, etc.
LC: CPM2C’s input impedance (kΩ)
IC: CPM2C’s input current (mA)
EC: CPM2C’s OFF voltage (V) = 5.0 V
I: Device’s leakage current (mA)
R: Bleeder resistance (kΩ)
W: Bleeder resistor’s power rating (W)
R+
LC
I
5.0
kW max.
L C–5.0
W + 2.3 W min.
R
The equations above were derived from the following equations:
R
Input voltage (24)
Input current (I C)
R)
Input voltage (24)
Input current (I C)
I
Wy
Input voltage (24)
R
x OFF voltage (E C : 5.0)
Input voltage (24)
tolerance (4)
Refer to 2-1-4 I/O Specifications for details on the values LC, IC, and EC.
The input impedance, input current, and OFF voltage may vary depending on the
input being used. (IN00000 through IN00002 have different values.)
81
Section
Wiring and Connections
Inductive Loads
3-4
When connecting an inductive load to an input, connect a diode in parallel with
the load. The diode should satisfy the following requirements:
1, 2, 3...
1. Peak reverse-breakdown voltage must be at least 3 times the load voltage.
2. Average rectified current must be 1 A.
IN
Diode
CPM2C
COM
3-4-8 Connecting Output Devices
Wire the outputs to the CPM2C’s CPU Unit and Expansion I/O Unit as shown in
the following diagrams.
Don’t exceed the output capacity or the maximum common current shown in the
following table.
! WARNING The PC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposits on or burning of the
output relays or destruction of the output transistors. External safety measures
must be provided to ensure safety in the system. Not providing proper safety
measures may result in serious accidents.
Output Configurations
CPU Units with 10 I/O Points, Relay Outputs
(CPM2C-10CDR-D/10C1DR-D)
Output capacity
2 A (250 VAC or 24 VDC)
Max. common capacity
4 A/common
Load
Load
Load
Load
82
Output terminals
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
CPU Units with 10 I/O Points, Sinking Transistor Outputs
(CPM2C-10CDTC-D/10C1DTC-D)
Output capacity
300 mA (24 VDC)
Max. common capacity
1.2 A/common
Output connector
Load
Load
Load
Load
24 VDC
CPU Units with 10 I/O Points, Sourcing Transistor Outputs
(CPM2C-10CDT1C-D/10C1DT1C-D)
Output capacity
300 mA (24 VDC)
Max. common capacity
1.2 A/common
Output connector
Load
Load
Load
Load
24 VDC
83
Section
Wiring and Connections
CPU Units with 20 I/O Points, Sinking Transistor Outputs
(CPM2C-20CDTC-D/20C1DTC-D)
Output capacity
300 mA (24 VDC)
Max. common capacity
2.4 A/common
Output connector
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
24 VDC
CPU Units with 20 I/O Points, Sourcing Transistor Outputs
(CPM2C-20CDT1C-D/20C1DT1C-D)
Output capacity
300 mA (24 VDC)
Max. common capacity
2.4 A/common
Output connector
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
24 VDC
84
3-4
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
Expansion I/O Unit with 10 I/O Points, Relay Outputs
(CPM2C-10EDR)
Output capacity
2 A (250 VAC or 24 VDC)
Max. common capacity
4 A/common
Output terminals
Load
01j00
COM
01j01
Load
COM
01j02
01j03
COM
Load
Load
Expansion I/O Unit with 24 I/O Points, Sinking Transistor Outputs
(CPM2C-24EDTC)
Output capacity
300 mA (24 VDC)
Max. common capacity
2.4 A/common
Output connector
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
01j00
01j01
01j02
01j03
01j04
01j05
01j06
01j07
COM
24 VDC
24 V
85
Section
Wiring and Connections
Expansion I/O Unit with 24 I/O Points, Sourcing Transistor Outputs
(CPM2C-24EDT1C)
Output capacity
300 mA (24 VDC)
Max. common capacity
2.4 A/common
Output connector
01j00
Load
01j01
Load
Load
01j02
Load
01j03
01j04
Load
01j05
Load
01j06
Load
01j07
Load
COM
0V
24 VDC
Expansion I/O Unit with 8 Output Points, Relay Outputs
(CPM2C-8ER)
Output capacity
2 A (250 VAC/24 VDC)
Max. common capacity
4 A/common
Output terminals
COM
Load
Load
01j03
01j02
COM
01j01
COM
Load
01j00
Load
7
1 01j04
6
2
5
3
4
4
3
5
2
6
1
7
COM
01j05
Load
COM
01j06
01j07
COM
Load
Load
Load
86
3-4
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
Expansion I/O Unit with 8 Output Points, Sinking Transistor Outputs
(CPM2C-8ETC)
Output capacity
300 mA (24 VDC)
Max. common capacity
2.4 A/common
Output connector
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
01j00
01j01
B
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
01j02
01j03
01j04
01j05
01j06
01j07
COM
24 VDC
A
1
24V
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
Expansion I/O Unit with 8 Output Points, Sourcing Transistor Outputs
(CPM2C-8ET1C)
Output capacity
300 mA (24 VDC)
Max. common capacity
2.4 A/common
Output connector
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
01j00
01j01
01j02
01j03
01j04
B
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
01j05
01j06
01j07
COM
24 VDC
A
1
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
0V
87
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
Expansion I/O Unit with 16 Output Points, Sinking Transistor Outputs
(CPM2C-16ETC)
Output capacity
Max. common capacity
00 to 07: 300 mA (24 VDC)
08 to 15: 100 mA (24 VDC)
3.2 A/common
Output connector
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
01j00
01j01
01j02
01j03
01j04
01j05
01j06
01j07
COM
24V
A
B
1
1
2
3
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
01j08
01j09
01j10
01j11
01j12
01j13
01j14
01j15
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
COM
24V
24 VDC
Note Wire COM terminals (A9 and B9) and 24-V terminals (A10 and B10) even though
they are connected internally.
Expansion I/O Unit with 16 Output Points, Sourcing Transistor Outputs
(CPM2C-16ET1C)
Output capacity
Max. common capacity
00 to 07: 300 mA (24 VDC)
08 to 15: 100 mA (24 VDC)
3.2 A/common
Output connector
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
01j00
01j01
A
B
1
1
2
2
01j02
01j03
01j04
01j05
01j06
01j07
COM
0V
01j08
01j09
01j10
3
3
4
4
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
01j11
01j12
01j13
01j14
01j15
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
COM
0V
24 VDC
Note Wire COM terminals (A9 and B9) and 0-V terminals (A10 and B10) even though
they are connected internally.
88
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
Wiring Output Terminals
The wiring for output terminals is as shown below.
Terminal Blocks: XW2B-20G4, XW2B-20G5; Connecting Cable: XW2Z-jjjA
Sinking transistor outputs
19
COM
17
01j07
15
01j06
13
01j05
11
01j04
9
01j03
Sourcing transistor outputs
20
18
01j00
01j07
01j14
14
01j05
7
8
6
5
3
4
01j04
10
01j03
7
8
6
5
3
4
01j02
01j09
01j01
01j08
2
1
12
9
01j11
01j10
14
11
01j12
10
16
13
01j13
12
01j15
15
01j06
01j00
COM
18
17
01j15
01j02
01j01
COM
16
20
19
COM
01j12
01j11
01j10
01j09
01j08
2
1
01j14
01j13
Terminal Blocks: XW2B-20G4, XW2B-20G5; Connecting Cable: G79-jC
Sinking outputs
Sourcing outputs
20
01j08
19
01j09
18
17
01j10
16
15
01j11
13
01j12
11
01j13
01j15
8
6
15
01j11
13
01j12
01j05
11
01j13
18
16
14
12
10
9
01j06
01j14
8
7
01j07
5
COM
3
2
01j02
01j03
01j04
01j05
01j06
01j07
COM
4
COM
1
01j00
01j01
6
01j15
4
3
17
01j10
01j04
5
COM
01j09
12
7
19
01j02
14
10
20
01j08
01j03
9
01j14
01j00
01j01
2
1
Relay Terminals: G70A-ZOC16-3 (sinking outputs), G70A-ZOC16-4 (sourcing outputs)
01 00
01 01
01 01
01 02
01 02
01 03
01 03
01 04
01 04
01 05
01 05
01 06
01 06
01 07
01 07
01 08
01 08
01 09
01 09
01 10
01 10
01 11
01 11
01 12
01 12
01 13
01 13
01 14
01 14
01 15
01 15
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
01 00
N.C.
N.O.
Connecting Cables: G79- jC, G2R-1-S(N)
N. C. contacts
+
L31
L30
L29
L28
L27
L26
L25
L24
L23
L22
L21
L20
L19
L18
L17
L16
L15
L14
L13
L12
L11
L9
L10
L8
L7
L6
L5
L4
L3
L32
Power supply
N. O. contacts
L2
L1
j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j
–
89
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
Note The relay numbers that can be used vary with the Unit used, as shown in the
following table.
Unit
Input relay numbers
CPU Unit with 10 I/O
points
CPU Unit with 20 I/O
points
Expansion I/O Unit with 10
I/O points
Expansion I/O Unit with 24
I/O points
Expansion I/O Unit with 8
input points
Expansion I/O Unit with 16
input points
Expansion I/O Unit with 8
output points
Expansion I/O Unit with 16
output points
Output relay numbers
00000 to 00005
01000 to 01003
00000 to 00011
01000 to 01007
00j00 to 00j05
01j00 to 01j03
00j00 to 00j15
01j00 to 01j07
00j00 to 00j07
---
00j00 to 00j15
---
---
01j00 to 01j07
---
01j00 to 01j15
Relay Terminal: G7TC-OC08
Relay Terminal: G7TC-OC16
Relay Terminal: G7TC-OC16-1
Connecting Cable: G79-jC
Connecting Cable: G79-jC
Connecting Cable: G79-jC
Sinking outputs only
Sinking outputs only
Power
supply
C7
C6
7
6
C5
C4
5
C3
3
4
01j07
C15 15
01j06
C14 14
C13 13
01j05
01j04
01j03
01j02
C2
2
C1
C0
1
01j01
–
01j00
0
+
C12 12
C11 11
C10 10
C9 9
C8
8
C7
7
6
C6
C5
C4
C3
90
Sourcing outputs only
Power
supply
5
4
3
01j15
01j14
01j13
01j12
01j11
01j10
01j09
01j08
01j07
01j06
01j05
01j04
01j03
Power
supply
C15 15
C14 14
C13 13
01j13
01j12
C11 11
C10 10
C9 9
01j11
C8
8
C7
7
6
C6
C5
C4
5
C3
3
C2
2
1
4
01j10
01j09
01j08
01j07
01j06
01j05
01j04
01j03
01j02
C2
2
C1
C0
1
0
C1
C0
–
+
–
01j00
01j14
C12 12
01j02
01j01
01j15
0
+
01j01
01j00
Section
Wiring and Connections
Relay Terminals: G70D-SOC16, G70D-FOM16
Relay Terminal: G70D-SOC16-1, G70D-FOM16-1
Connecting Cable: G79-jC
Connecting Cable: G79-jC
Sourcing outputs only
Sinking outputs only
NC
NC
NC
NC
Power
supply
A0
A2
B0
B2
01j04
01j06
Power
supply
A4
A6
B2
B4
01j08
01j10
Power
supply
Power
supply
01j12
01j14
NC
NC
01j00
01j00
01j02
3-4
A1
A3
01j01
01j02
01j03
Power
supply
B1
B3
A5
A7
B0
B2
01j04
01j05
01j06
01j07
B3
B5
A8
A9
A10
A11
B4
B5
B6
B7
A12
A13
A14
A15
Power
supply
Power
supply
Power
supply
01j10
01j11
01j13
01j15
01j01
A1
A3
01j03
Power
supply
B1
B3
A5
A7
01j05
01j07
Power
supply
B3
B4
01j08
Power
supply
A4
A6
B2
01j09
Power
supply
A0
A2
Power
supply
Power
supply
01j12
01j14
B5
A8
A9
A10
A11
B4
B5
B6
B7
A12
A13
A14
A15
01j09
01j11
Power
supply
Power
supply
01j13
01j15
91
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
The following diagrams show example applications of sink-type transistor outputs using output bits IR 01000 and IR 01001. Use the PULS(65), SPED(––),
ACC(––), PWM(––), and SYNC(––) instructions to produce pulse outputs (rather than normal outputs) from output bits IR 01000 and IR 01001.
Using Pulse Outputs
Single-phase pulse output
(Fixed duty ratio)
CPM2C
Single-phase pulse output
(Variable duty ratio)
Motor driver
Pulse output 0:
01000
CPM2C
Relay
Pulse output 0:
01000
Relay
Motor driver
Pulse output 1:
01001
Pulse output 1:
01001
COM
COM
24 V
24 V
Pulse plus direction output
CPM2C
Increment pulse output
Motor driver
Pulse output 0:
01000
Direction output:
01001
COM
24 V
Direction
input
CPM2C
Motor driver
CW* pulse output:
01000
CW input
CCW* pulse output:
01001
CCW input
COM
24 V
Note *CW is clockwise and CCW is counter-clockwise.
Output Wiring
Precautions
Observe the following precautions to protect the PC’s internal components.
Output Short Protection
The output or internal circuitry might be damaged when the load connected to an
output is short-circuited, so it is recommended to install a protective fuse in each
output circuit.
92
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
Inductive Loads
When connecting an inductive load to an input, connect a surge protector or
diode in parallel with the load.
The surge protector’s components should have the following ratings:
Relay Output
OUT
CPM2C
COM
Relay Output
Transistor Output
(Sinking)
Surge protector
OUT
CPM2C
COM
Diode
Relay Output
Transistor Output
(Sourcing)
OUT
CPM2C
Diode
COM
The diode should satisfy the following requirements:
Peak reverse-breakdown voltage must be at least 3 times the load voltage.
Average rectified current must be 1 A.
Inrush Current Considerations
When switching a load with a high inrush current in the CPM2C relay output or
transistor output model, such as an incandescent lamp, suppress the inrush current as shown below.
Countermeasure 1
OUT
Countermeasure 2
R
OUT
R
COM
Providing a dark current of
approx. one-third of the rated
value through an incandescent
lamp
COM
Providing a limiting resistor
Fuse Insertion
The CPM2C with transistor output may burn if the load is short-circuited, therefore, insert a protective fuse in series to the load.
93
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
3-4-9 RS-422 Port Connection
When using the RS-422/RS-232C Adapter Unit (CPM2C-CIF11) in a Host Link
connection (1:N), wire the RS-422 port as shown below.
Host
RS-232C
FG
7
FG
SG
3
SG
2
RDA
6
1
RDA
SDA
4
1
RDA
RDB
1
2
RDB
SDB
3
2
RDB
SDA
9
3
SDA
RDA
6
3
SDA
SDB
5
4
SDB
RDB
5
4
SDB
CSB
7
5
NC
CSA
8
5
B500-AL004
Host
RS-232C
NC
CPM2C-CIF11
1
CPM2C-CIF11
NT-AL001
RS-422
1
RDA
2
RS-422
1
RDA
RDB
2
RDB
3
SDA
3
SDA
4
SDB
4
SDB
NC
5
NC
5
CPM2C-CIF11
CPM2C-CIF11
Note Turn ON the terminating resistance in the last Unit for stable communications.
3-4-10 Programming Device Connections
Programming Console
Use one of the connecting cables shown in the following diagram to connect a
Programming Console to the CPM2C.
Peripheral port
CPM2C-CN111 (0.15 m)
CPM2C CPU Unit
Main cable (2 m)
CQM1-PRO01
(with attached 2-m cable)
CS1W-CN114 (0.05 m)
C200H-CN222 (2 m)
C200H-CN422 (4 m)
CS1W-CN224 (2 m)
CS1W-CN624 (6 m)
C200H-PRO27
94
CPM2C-CIF01
Section
Wiring and Connections
One-to-one Computer
Connection
3-4
Use one of the connecting cables shown in the following diagram to connect a
personal computer with Support Software to the CPM2C’s RS-232C port for 1:1
Host Link communications or no-protocol (serial) communications.
RS-232C Port Connection
A personal computer can be connected to the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port with an
XW2Z-j00S or XW2Z-j00S-V Connecting Cable. The XW2Z-j00S Cables
have a D-sub 25-pin connector and the XW2Z-j00S-V Cables have a D-sub
9-pin connector.
Connecting Cable
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
computer
RS-232C port (D-sub 9-pin)
CPM2C CPU Unit
XW2Z-200S-V (2 m)
XW2Z-500S-V (5 m)
CPM2C-CN111 (0.15 m)
CS1W-CN118 (0.1 m)
CPM2C-CIF01
CPM2C-CIF11
95
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
Peripheral Port Connection
A personal computer can be connected to the CPU Unit’s communications port
through a CQM1-CIF02 RS-232C Adapter. The CQM1-CIF02 RS-232C
Adapter has a 9-pin connector.
Peripheral port
CPM2C CPU Unit
CQM1-CIF02 (3.3 m)
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
computer
CPM2C-CN111 (0.15 m)
CS1W-CN114 (0.05 m)
CPM2C-CIF01
Note
96
1. The CS1W-CN226/626 Connecting Cables can be used, but the CS1WCN225/625 and CS1W-CN227/627 Connecting Cables cannot be used.
2. The CQM1-CIF11 Connecting Cable cannot be used. (If one is connected,
the CPM2C will not recognize it; the PC will enter RUN mode at startup if the
PC Setup (DM 6600) is set so that the Programming Console’s mode switch
controls the startup mode.)
3. Refer to Section 4 Using Programming Devices for details on the Support
Software that can be used with the CPM2C.
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
Up to 32 OMRON PCs, including CPM2C PCs, can be connected to a host computer.
One-to-N Host Link
Connection
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
computer
Connecting Cable
XW2Z-200S-V (2 m)
XW2Z-500S-V (5 m)
B500-AL004 or NT-AL001 (requires +5 V)
(See notes 1 and 2.)
RS-422 (Total length: 500 m max.)
When using the port
as a peripheral port
CPM2C
CPU Unit
CPM2-CIF11
When using the port
as an RS-232C port
CPM2C
CPU Unit
CPM2-CIF11
CPM2-CIF11
NT-AL001
(See note 1.)
RS-232C port
CPM2C
CPU Unit
CPM2C
CPU Unit
NT-AL001
(See note 1.)
NT-AL001
(See note 1.)
XW2Z-070T-1 (0.7 m)
XW2Z-200T-1 (2 m)
XW2Z-070T-1 (0.7 m)
XW2Z-200T-1 (2 m)
RS-232C port
CPM2C-CN111
Connecting Cable
(0.15 m)
XW2Z-070T-1 (0.7 m)
XW2Z-200T-1 (2 m)
CPM2C
CPU Unit
CPM2C
CPU Unit
RS-232C port
CSW1-CN118 Connecting Cable (0.1 m)
CPM2-CIF01
Up to 32 PCs
Note
1. The NT-AL001 must be supplied externally with 5 VDC. When an NT-AL001
is connected to a CPM2C PC, pin 6 of the CPM2C’s RS-232C port supplies
+5 VDC and an external power supply is not necessary.
2. The B500-AL004 requires an external AC power supply (110 VAC or
220 VAC).
3. Be sure that the power supply requirements of the CPU Unit, Expansion
Units, and Expansion I/O Units do not exceed the available capacity. Only
three Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units can be connected when the
NT-AL001 Adapter connected to the RS-232C port.
97
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
3-4-11 No-Protocol Communications
The TXD(48) and RXD(47) instructions can be used in no-protocol mode to exchange data with standard serial devices. For example, data can be received
from a bar code reader or transmitted to a serial printer. The serial devices can
be connected to the communications port as a RS-232C port or peripheral port,
as shown in the following diagrams.
CPM2C CPU Unit
RS-232C devices
S Bar code reader
S Serial printer
S Other serial device
Note See One-to-one Computer Connections on page 94 for details on the system
configurations that can be assembled for serial communications.
98
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
3-4-12 OMRON PT Connections
In a 1:1 NT Link, a CPM2C can be connected directly to a Programmable Terminal. The direct connection with a Programmable Terminal is possible by using
the communications as a RS-232C port only (not as a peripheral port).
A Programmable Terminal can also be connected by a Host Link connection. Either the RS-232C port or peripheral port connection can be used for the Host
Link.
Connecting Cable
RS-232C port
(D-sub 9-pin)
CPM2C CPU Unit
RS-232C
port
XW2Z-200T (2 m)
XW2Z-500T (5 m)
RS-232C connection
OMRON
Programmable
Terminal
CPM2C-CN111 (0.15 m)
CS1W-CN118 (0.1 m)
RS-232C ← peripheral port
RS-422 connection
RS-232C port
CPM2C-CIF01
RS-422 ← peripheral port
NT-AL001
RS-232C Adapter
RS-232C port
XW2Z-070T-1 (0.7 m)
XW2Z-200T-1 (2 m)
CPM2C-CIF11
Note The Programmable Terminal cannot be connected using a peripheral port connection when communicating via an NT Link.
99
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
3-4-13 One-to-one PC Link Connections
A CPM2C can be linked to another CPM2C, a CQM1, CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A,
SRM1(-V2), C200HS, or C200HX/HE/HG PC. The PC must be connected using
the communications port as an RS-232C port (not as a peripheral port).
1:1 Link Master
CPM2C CPU Unit
RS-232C port (D-sub 9-pin)
1:1 Link Slave
CPM2C CPU Unit
RS-232C port (D-sub 9-pin)
CPM2C-CN111
(0.1 m)
CPM2C-CN111 (0.1 m)
Connecting Cable
XW2Z-200T (2 m)
XW2Z-500T (5 m)
CS1W-CN118
(0.1 m)
CS1W-CN118 (0.1 m)
CPM2C-CIF01
CPM2C-CIF01
CPM2C-CIF11
CPM2C-CIF11
OMRON PC (CQM1, CPM1, CPM1A,
CPM2A, SRM1(-V2), C200HS, or
C200HX/HE/HG)
OMRON PC (CQM1, CPM1, CPM1A,
CPM2A, SRM1(-V2), C200HS, or
C200HX/HE/HG)
Note Even though the peripheral port on the CPM2C-CIF01 can output RS-232C, this
port cannot be used for one-to-one link communications.
3-4-14 CompoBus/S I/O Link Connections
A CompoBus/S I/O Link can be used to create an I/O link (remote I/O) of 8 input
points and 8 output points with a CompoBus/S Master Unit or SRM1 PC. The
connection is made through a CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit.
From the standpoint of the CPM2C CPU Unit, the area allocated to the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit can be treated just like the area allocated to an Expansion I/O
100
Section
Wiring and Connections
3-4
Unit. The difference is that the bits are not actual I/O points, but I/O bits in the
Master Unit.
CompoBus/S Master Unit (or SRM1 PC)
C200HX/HG/HE PC
CPM2C CPU Unit
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit
(Slave)
Cables
Use special flat cable or VCTF cable to connect the nodes in the CompoBus/S
I/O Link. (Special flat cables and VCTF cables cannot be combined in the same
system.)
Name
Specifications
Flat cable
4-core flat cable, 0.75 mm2
VCTF cable
2-core x 0.75 mm2
101
SECTION 4
Using Programming Devices
This section outlines the operations possible with the SYSMAC-CPT, SYSMAC Support Software (SSS) and the Programming Consoles. Actual CPT operating procedures are provided in the CPT User Manual. Actual SSS operating procedures are
provided in the SSS Operation Manuals: Basics and C-series PCs. Operations for the WS02-CXPC1-E CX-Programmer are
provided in the WS02-CXPC1-E CX-Programmer User Manual (W361) and the CX-Server User Manual (W362).
Refer to 3-4-10 Programming Device Connections and 4-3-1 Connecting the Programming Console for details on connecting
a Programming Console or personal computer to the CPM2C.
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
SYSMAC-CPT Support Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2 Limitations and Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-3 Using the SYSMAC-CPT Support Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSMAC Support Software (SSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-2 Limitations and Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-1 Connecting the Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-2 Compatible Programming Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-3 Changing the CPM2C’s Mode with the Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-4 Preparation for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-5 Entering the Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Console Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-2 Clearing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-3 Reading/Clearing Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-4 Buzzer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-5 Assigning Expansion Instruction Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-6 Setting and Reading a Program Memory Address and Monitoring I/O Bit Status
4-4-7 Entering or Editing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-8 Instruction Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-9 Bit Operand Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-10 Inserting and Deleting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-11 Checking the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-12 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-13 Differentiation Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-14 Binary Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-15 Three-Word Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-16 Signed Decimal Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-17 Unsigned Decimal Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-18 Three-Word Data Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-19 Changing Timer, Counter SV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-20 Hexadecimal, BCD Data Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-21 Binary Data Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-22 Signed Decimal Data Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-23 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-24 Force Set, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-25 Clear Force Set/Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-26 Hex-ASCII Display Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-27 Displaying the Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-28 Reading and Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-1 Preparatory Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-2 Example Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-3 Programming Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-4 Checking the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-5 Test Run in MONITOR Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
104
104
106
111
111
112
114
114
116
118
120
120
122
122
123
124
124
125
126
126
129
130
131
132
132
134
135
136
136
137
137
138
139
140
140
141
142
143
143
144
144
145
145
146
147
150
150
103
Section
SYSMAC-CPT Support Software
4-1
4-1
SYSMAC-CPT Support Software
4-1-1 Introduction
The SYSMAC-CPT Support Software is a complete programming and control
package. It provides not only programming capabilities, but also advanced
debugging, monitoring, and program/data management. The software is compatible with Windows 3.1, Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows NT 3.5/4.0.
Any version of the SYSMAC-CPT Support Software can be used to program
CPM2C PCs with the limitations described later in this section. For further
information and actual operating procedures, please refer to the SYSMAC-CPT
Support Software Quick Start Guide (W332) and User Manual (W333).
Refer to 3-4-10 Programming Device Connections for details on connecting a
personal computer to the CPM2C.
4-1-2 Limitations and Precautions
When programming a CPM2C PC with the SYSMAC-CPT Support Software,
set the PC model to “CQM1” and the CPU model to “CPU43.” There are some
software limitations because of differences between the CPM2C and
CQM1-CPU43 CPUs.
Program Input and
Program Check
CQM1 data areas are larger than the corresponding CPM2C data areas, so the
data area addresses that don’t actually exist in the CPM2C or instructions not
supported by the CPM2C can be input and won’t be detected in the program
check. Be sure that the word and bit addresses are within the specified ranges
and that all instructions are supported.
If a program contains a data area address that exceeds the range of a CPM2C
data area, a memory error will be generated when the program is executed and
the Memory Area Specification Error Flag (AR 1308) will be turned ON.
Data area
CQM1 range
CPM2C range
Input words
IR 000 to IR 011
IR 000 to IR 009
Output words
IR 100 to IR 111
IR 010 to IR 019
Work words and
dedicated words
SR area
IR 012 to IR 099
IR 112 to IR 227
SR 228 to SR 255
IR 020 to IR 049/IR 200 to IR 227
(IR 050 to IR 199 cannot be used.)
SR 228 to SR 255
HR area
HR 00 to HR 99
HR 00 to HR 19
(HR 20 to HR 99 cannot be used.)
AR area
AR 00 to AR 27
AR 00 to AR 23
(AR 24 to AR 27 cannot be used.)
LR area
LR 00 to LR 63
LR 00 to LR 15
(LR 16 to LR 63 cannot be used.)
Timer/Counter
TIM/CNT 000 to 511 TIM/CNT 000 to 255
area
(TIM/CNT 256 to 511 cannot be used.)
DM
Read/write DM 0000 to DM 6143 DM 0000 to DM 1999,
area
DM 2022 to DM 2047
(DM 2048 to DM 6143 cannot be used.)
Read-only
Error Log
PC Setup
DM 6144 to DM 6568 DM 6144 to DM 6599
DM 6569 to DM 6599 DM 2000 to DM 2021
DM 6600 to DM 6655 DM 6600 to DM 6655
Since the PC model is set to “CQM1,” a program that will run properly in the
CQM1 will pass the program check even if it won’t run properly in the CPM2C.
Monitoring, Online
Editing, and Set Values
104
An error message will be displayed and the values will not be accepted if a data
area address that exceeds the range of a CPM2C data area is entered for monitoring, an instruction operand, or a timer/counter SV.
Section
SYSMAC-CPT Support Software
4-1
Available Program
Memory
The program capacity of the CQM1 (7,200 words) is greater than that of the
CPM2C (4,096 words), and so the display will show more free space than is actually available. Be sure to keep the actual program capacity in mind while programming.
Program Transfer
When the program is transferred from the PC to the CPT with the default function
code assignments, FUN18, FUN19, FUN87, and FUN88 will be displayed as
TKY, MCMP, DSW, and 7SEG. The instructions, however, will be transferred
correctly.
An error will occur if any instructions not supported by the CPT are transferred
from the CPM2C.
When the program is transferred from the CPT to the PC, TKY, MCMP, DSW,
and 7SEG will be displayed on the CPT, but will not be executed in the CPU Unit.
They will be treated as NOP(00).
If expansion instructions are transferred to the PC with DM 6602 is set to the “default settings” or if instructions not supported by the CPM2C are transferred to
the PC, a message saying that expansion instructions cannot be written because DIP switch pin 4 is OFF will be displayed. Change the setting of DM 6602
to enable user settings to use expansion instructions.
Expansion Instructions
It will not be possible to transfer the program if the function codes assigned to
expansion instructions (18 instructions) have been changed from their default
settings. A message to turn ON the DIP switch of the PC and execute again will
be displayed. Change the function code assignments to the CQM1 defaults
shown in the following table before programming.
Function code
Default CPM2C Assignments
Default CQM1 Assignments
17
ASFT
ASFT
18
---
TKY
19
---
MCMP
47
RXD
RXD
48
TXD
TXD
60
CMPL
CMPL
61
INI
INI
62
PRV
PRV
63
CTBL
CTBL
64
SPED
SPED
65
PULS
PULS
66
SCL
SCL
67
BCNT
BCNT
68
BCMP
BCMP
69
STIM
STIM
87
---
DSW
88
---
7SEG
89
INT
INT
There are four CPM2C instructions (STUP(––), SYNC(––), TIML(––), and
TMHH(––)) that are not supported by the CQM1 and cannot be used. If one of
these instructions is used in the program, an error will occur when the program is
transferred from the PC to the computer.
The input word for the frequency for PWM must be between IR 000 and IR 049,
or between IR 200 and IR 252.
If a CQM1 instruction that is not supported by the CPM2C is used in the program,
an error will occur when the program is transferred from the computer to the PC.
105
SYSMAC-CPT Support Software
Section
4-1
Error Log
The error log cannot be displayed. If data has been written to DM 6569 to
DM 6599, however, this data will be incorrectly displayed as the error log. Do not
use the information that is displayed.
PC Setup
Some of the CPM2C’s PC Setup settings are different from those in the CQM1,
so not all settings can be made from the menus. These settings have to be made
by writing data directly to the word containing the setting.
4-1-3 Using the SYSMAC-CPT Support Software
This section shows how to perform basic SYSMAC-CPT Support Software operations with the CPM2C PC. (The software is operating in a Windows 95 environment in these examples.)
Starting the Software
The SYSMAC-CPT Support Software is a Windows 3.1/Windows 98/Windows
NT (3.5/4.0) application. Refer to the SYSMAC-CPT Support Software User
Manual (W333) for details on computer requirements and the software installation procedure.
1, 2, 3...
1. Select “Programs (P)” from the Start Menu, “SYSMAC-CPT,” and then
“SYSMAC-CPT” to start the software.
2. Read the notes provided in the startup messages and click “OK.”
3. The SYSMAC-CPT Support Software will start.
Note To exit from the SYSMAC-CPT Support Software, select “File (F)” from the menu
bar and “Exit (X)” from the File menu.
106
Section
SYSMAC-CPT Support Software
Creating a New Project
1, 2, 3...
4-1
Follow this procedure when using SYSMAC-CPT Support Software for the first
time or creating a new project. Specify the PC model and CPU version of the PC
being used.
1. Select “File (F)” from the menu bar and “New (N)” from the File menu.
2. Input the name of the new project, set the PC model to “CQM1,” set the CPU
version to “CPU43,” and click “OK.”
d) Click OK.
a) Input the
project name.
b) Set the PC model to CQM1.
c) Set the PC model to CQM1.
3. The new project’s ladder diagram will be displayed.
107
Section
SYSMAC-CPT Support Software
4-1
The SYSMAC-CPT Support Software can display programs in ladder-diagram
format or mnemonic format. To switch the display/editing format, select
“View (V)” from the menu bar, “Program editor (P),” and then “Ladder (L)” or
“Mnemonic (M).”
Writing and Editing the
Ladder Program
Ladder-diagram format
Transferring the Program
Mnemonic format
Refer to 3-4-10 Programming Device Connections for details on connecting the
CPM2C to a personal computer.
Turn ON Communications Switch 2 before connecting the CPM2C to a personal
computer running the SYSMAC-CPT Support Software.
Communications Switch 2
(Turn ON when using SYSMAC-CPT
Support Software.)
Note Do not turn ON Communications Switch 2 if the CPM2C is connected to a Programming Console or other device such as a CPM1-CIF01/11 or
CQM1-CIF01/02. If the switch is turned ON, communications will be interrupted
and a communications error will occur. A Programming Console will become unresponsive, key inputs won’t be received, and the display will not change.
Operating Modes
The operating mode of the CPM2C when the power is turned ON depends upon
the PC Setup settings and the Programming Console’s mode switch setting if a
Programming Console is connected. See 1-3-3 Operating Mode at Startup for
details.
The CMP2C has three operating modes: PROGRAM, MONITOR, and RUN.
When the CPT is offline, the CPM2C will operate in PROGRAM mode. When the
CPT is online, the CPM2C operating mode can be controlled from the CPT.
108
Section
SYSMAC-CPT Support Software
4-1
PROGRAM Mode
The CPM2C program isn’t executed in PROGRAM mode. Use PROGRAM
mode to create and edit the program, clear memory, or check the program for
errors.
MONITOR Mode
The CPM2C program is executed in MONITOR mode and I/O is processed just
as it is in RUN mode. Use MONITOR mode to test system operations, such as
monitoring CPM2C operating status, force-setting and resetting I/O bits, changing the SV/PV of timers and counters, changing word data, and online editing.
RUN Mode
This is the CPM2C’s normal operating mode. The CPM2C’s operating status
can be monitored from a Programming Device, but bits can’t be force-set/forcereset and the SV/PV of timers and counters can’t be changed.
Switching to Online Operation
The SYSMAC-CPT Support Software must make an online connection in order
to communicate with the CPM2C, transfer the program, or change the CPM2C’s
operating mode.
1, 2, 3...
1. Select “Online (O)” from the menu bar and “Go online (G)” from the Online
menu.
2. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click “OK” to go online.
Cancel
109
Section
SYSMAC-CPT Support Software
4-1
3. The ladder-diagram display will change to indicate the online connection.
Changes to “Program,” showing
the PC’s operating mode.
Transferring the Program
Use the following procedure to transfer a program to the PC.
Before attempting to transfer the program, make sure that the SYSMAC-CPT
Support Software is online and that the CPM2C is in PROGRAM mode. The program cannot be transferred unless the PC is in PROGRAM mode.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check that the PC is in PROGRAM mode, select “Online (O)” from the menu
bar, and “Transfer (Computer → PC (T))” from the Online menu.
Make sure that the CPM2C is in PROGRAM mode
before attempting to transfer the program.
2. Select “Program” and click “Transfer (Computer → PC)” to begin transfer
the program.
a) Select “Program.”
110
b) Click to begin
the program
transfer.
Section
SYSMAC Support Software (SSS)
4-2
Checking Operation in MONITOR Mode
Use the following procedure to switch the CPM2C to MONITOR mode.
1, 2, 3...
1. Make sure that the SYSMAC-CPT Support Software is online. Select “Online (O)” from the menu bar, select “Mode (M),” and then “MONITOR (M).”
2. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click “OK” to switch to MONITOR
mode.
Cancel
Starting Operation in RUN Mode
Use the following procedure to switch the CPM2C to RUN mode.
1, 2, 3...
1. Make sure that the SYSMAC-CPT Support Software is online. Select “Online (O)” from the menu bar, select “Mode (M),” and then “RUN (R).”
2. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click “OK” to switch to RUN
mode.
Cancel
4-2
SYSMAC Support Software (SSS)
4-2-1 Introduction
The SSS is a complete programming and control package designed for C-series
and CVM1 PCs. It provides not only programming capabilities, but also
advanced debugging, monitoring, and program/data management. For further
information and actual operating procedures, please refer to the SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manuals: Basics and C Series.
111
Section
SYSMAC Support Software (SSS)
4-2
CPM2C programming can be performed with any version of the SSS.
Refer to 3-4-10 Programming Device Connections for details on connecting a
personal computer to the CPM2C.
4-2-2 Limitations and Precautions
When programming a CPM2C PC with the SSS, set the PC model to “CQM1.”
There are some software limitations because of differences between the
CPM2C and CQM1 CPUs.
CQM1
A:
K:
Program Input and
Program Check
CVM1-CPU21
CQM1
CQM1 data areas are larger than the corresponding CPM2C data areas, so the
data area addresses that don’t actually exist in the CPM2C or instructions not
supported by the CPM2C can be input and won’t be detected in the program
check. Be sure that the word and bit addresses are within the specified ranges
and that all instructions are supported.
If a program contains a data area address that exceeds the range of a CPM2C
data area, a memory error will be generated when the program is executed and
the Memory Area Specification Error Flag (AR 1308) will be turned ON.
Data area
CQM1 range
CPM2C range
Input words
IR 000 to IR 011
IR 000 to IR 009
Output words
IR 100 to IR 111
IR 010 to IR 019
Work words
SR area
IR 012 to IR 099
IR 112 to IR 227
SR 228 to SR 255
IR 020 to IR 049/IR 200 to IR 227
(IR 050 to IR 199 cannot be used.)
SR 228 to SR 255
HR area
HR 00 to HR 99
HR 00 to HR 19
(HR 20 to HR 99 cannot be used.)
AR area
AR 00 to AR 27
AR 00 to AR 23
(AR 24 to AR 27 cannot be used.)
LR area
LR 00 to LR 63
LR 00 to LR 15
(LR 16 to LR 63 cannot be used.)
Timer/Counter
TIM/CNT 000 to 511 TIM/CNT 000 to 255
area
(TIM/CNT 256 to 511 cannot be used.)
DM
Read/write DM 0000 to DM 6143 DM 0000 to DM 1999,
area
DM 2022 to DM 2047
(DM 2048 to DM 6143 cannot be used.)
Read-only
Error Log
PC Setup
DM 6144 to DM 6568 DM 6144 to DM 6599
DM 6569 to DM 6599 DM 2000 to DM 2021
DM 6600 to DM 6655 DM 6600 to DM 6655
Since the PC model is set to “CQM1,” a program that will run properly in the
CQM1 will pass the program check even if it won’t run properly in the CPM2C.
Monitoring, Online
Editing, and Set Values
112
An error message will be displayed and the values will not be accepted if a data
area address that exceeds the range of a CPM2C data area is entered for monitoring, time charts, an instruction operand, or a timer/counter SV.
Section
SYSMAC Support Software (SSS)
4-2
Transferring and
Verifying DM Area Data
DM Area addresses not supported by the CPM2C cannot be transferred or monitored. DM 1024 to DM 6143 are not checked for DM Area verification.
Available Program
Memory
Since the program capacity of the CQM1 (7,200 words) is greater than that of the
CPM2C (4,096 words), the display will show more free space than is actually
available. Be sure to keep the actual program capacity in mind while programming.
Program Transfer
When the program is transferred from the PC to the SSS with the default function
code assignments, FUN18, FUN19, FUN87, and FUN88 will be displayed as
TKY, MCMP, DSW, and 7SEG. The instructions, however, will be transferred
correctly.
“???” will be displayed if any instructions not supported by the SSS are transferred from the CPM2C. Mnemonics will be displayed, however, if any have
been defined for the specified function code.
When the program is transferred from the SSS to the PC, TKY, MCMP, DSW,
and 7SEG will be displayed on the SSS, but will not be executed in the CPU Unit.
They will be treated as NOP.
If expansion instructions are transferred to the PC with DM 6602 is set to the “default settings,” a message saying that expansion instructions cannot be written
because DIP switch pin 4 is OFF will be displayed. Change the setting of
DM 6602 to enable user settings to use expansion instructions. If instructions
not supported by the CPM2C are transferred to the PC, a message saying to set
expansion instructions will be displayed, and transfer will not be possible.
Expansion Instructions
It will not be possible to transfer the program if the function codes assigned to
expansion instructions have been changed from their default settings. A message to turn ON the DIP switch of the PC and execute again will be displayed.
Change the function code assignments to the CQM1 defaults shown in the following table before programming.
Function code
Default CPM2C Assignments
17
ASFT
ASFT
Default CQM1 Assignments
18
---
TKY
19
---
MCMP
47
RXD
RXD
48
TXD
TXD
60
CMPL
CMPL
61
INI
INI
62
PRV
PRV
63
CTBL
CTBL
64
SPED
SPED
65
PULS
PULS
66
SCL
SCL
67
BCNT
BCNT
68
BCMP
BCMP
69
STIM
STIM
87
---
DSW
88
---
7SEG
89
INT
INT
If a CQM1 instruction that is not supported by the CPM2C is used in the program,
an error will occur when the program is transferred from the computer to the PC.
There are four CPM2C instructions (STUP(––), SYNC(––), TIML(––), and
TMHH(––)) that are not supported by the CQM1. These instructions can be used
by transferring the expansion instructions from the CPM2C to the SSS. This procedure is outlined in the following.
113
Section
Using a Programming Console
1, 2, 3...
4-3
1. Select “Transfer Instr” from the “Utility” menu.
2. Confirm the transfer by pressing “Y” when the confirmation pop-up is displayed.
3. The “Utility” menu will be displayed again when the transfer is completed.
Since some of the CPM2C’s PC Setup settings are different from those in the
CQM1, not all settings can be made from the menus. These settings have to be
made by writing data directly to the word containing the setting.
PC Setup
4-3
Using a Programming Console
This section provides information on connecting and using a Programming Console. Refer to 5-3 Programming Console Operation Errors for details on errors
that might occur during Programming Console operations.
4-3-1 Connecting the Programming Console
A Programming Console can be connected to the CPM2C’s communications
port or the peripheral port on a CPM2C-CN111 Connecting Cable; it cannot be
connected to the CPM2C-CN111 Connecting Cable’s RS-232C port.
Before connecting the Programming Console, turn OFF Communications
Switch 2 on the front of the CPM2C CPU Unit. The green “PRO” indicator on the
CPU Unit will light.
Communications Switch 2
Note
114
1. When Communications Switch 2 is OFF, the Programming Console functions of an OMRON PT connected to the RS-232C port cannot be used.
Turn ON Communications Switch 2 to use the PT’s Programming Console
functions.
2. Do not change the setting of Communications Switch 2 if a Programming
Console or other device such as a CPM1-CIF01/11 or CQM1-CIF01/02 is
connected. Changing the setting will interrupt communications and cause a
communications error. If a Programming Console is connected, it will become unresponsive, key inputs won’t be received, and the display will not
change.
3. If the Programming Console’s cable is disconnected and then reconnected
within 2 seconds, it won’t be necessary to reenter the password and the previous display status will remain. In some cases, it won’t be necessary to reenter the password if the Programming Console’s cable is disconnected
while a time-consuming operation (such as a program check) is being performed.
Section
Using a Programming Console
4-3
Connect the Programming Console to the CPM2C as shown below.
Peripheral port (to communications port)
CPM2C CPU Unit
CPM2C-CN111
Connecting Cable
CS1W-CN114
Connecting Cable
CQM1-PRO01
CPM2C CPU Unit
C200H-CN222 or
C200H-CN422
Connecting Cable
CQM1-PRO27
CS1W-CN224 or
CS1W-CN624
Connecting Cable
Peripheral port (to
communications
port)
CPM2C-CIF01
Panel Installation
The C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console can be installed in a control panel
as shown in the following diagram. (The C200H-ATT01 Mounting Bracket is sold
separately.)
Mounting Bracket
Mounting hole dimensions
(DIN43700 standards)
Two screws
+1.1
186 –0
Panel thickness: 1.0 to 3.2 mm
92 +0.8
–0
115
Section
Using a Programming Console
4-3
Allow at least 80 mm for the cable connector above the Programming Console.
37
15
At least 80 mm is required.
Either connector may
be used.
About 70 mm is required.
4-3-2 Compatible Programming Consoles
There are two Programming Consoles that can be used with the CPM2C: The
CQM1-PRO01-E and the C200H-PRO27-E. The key functions for these Programming Consoles are identical.
Press and hold the Shift Key to input a letter shown in the upper-left corner of the
key or the upper function of a key that has two functions. For example, the
CQM1-PRO01-E’s AR/HR Key can specify either the AR or HR Area; press and
release the Shift Key and then press the AR/HR Key to specify the AR Area.
CQM1-PRO01-E
Attached Connecting
Cable (2 m)
LCD display
Mode switch
Operation keys
116
Section
Using a Programming Console
4-3
C200H-PRO27-E
LCD display
Mode switch
Operation keys
Cassette recorded jack
(Cannot be used with the CPM2C).
Connecting Cables
C200H-CN222 (2 m)
C200H-CN422 (4 m)
Different Keys
The following keys are labeled differently on the CQM1-PRO01-E and the
C200H-PRO27-E, but the operation of the keys in each pair is identical.
CQM1-PRO01-E Keys
C200H-PRO27-E Keys
AR
HR
HR
PLAY
SET
SET
REC
RESET
RESET
Note To specify the AR area, use SHIFT and HR Keys for the C200H-PRO27-E and
use SHIFT and AR/HR Keys for the CQM1-PRO01-E.
A shift symbol will be displayed in the upper-right corner of the screen when the
Shift Key is pressed. The shift input can be cleared by pressing the Shift Key
again.
^
SHIFT
Mode Switch
Shift input
symbol
The mode switch controls the CPM2C’s operating mode. The key can be removed when the switch is set to RUN or MONITOR but it cannot be removed
when the switch is set to PROGRAM.
117
Section
Using a Programming Console
Contrast Control
4-3
The display contrast can be adjusted with the control on the right side of the Programming Console.
Contrast control
Buzzer Volume
The C200H-PRO27-E’s buzzer volume can be adjusted with the lever on the
right side of the Programming Console. The CQM1-PRO01-E’s buzzer volume
cannot be adjusted.
Low volume
High volume
C200H-PRO27-E
Note The buzzer volume can be turned on and off with a key operation. See 4-4-4
Buzzer Operation for details.
4-3-3 Changing the CPM2C’s Mode with the Mode Switch
Once the Programming Console has been connected, its mode switch can be
used to change the CPM2C’s operating mode. The mode display (, , or ) will appear on the Programming Console
screen.
• No key operations can be performed while the mode display is displayed on
the Programming Console screen. Press CLR to clear the display so that key
operations can be performed.
• If the SHIFT Key is pressed while the mode switch is turned, the original display will remain on the Programming Console’s screen and the mode display
won’t appear.
118
Section
Using a Programming Console
4-3
• The CPM2C will enter RUN mode automatically if a Programming Console
isn’t connected when the CPM2C is turned on.
MONITOR
RUN
PROGRAM
MONITOR
RUN
PROGRAM
MONITOR
RUN
PROGRAM
Mode display
BZ
Operation
CLR
Initial display
BZ
Operation
SHIFT
BZ
CLR
00000
Operating Modes
PROGRAM Mode
The CPM2C program isn’t executed in PROGRAM mode. Use PROGRAM
mode to create and edit the program, clear memory, or check the program for
errors.
MONITOR Mode
The CPM2C program is executed in MONITOR mode and I/O is processed just
as it is in RUN mode. Use MONITOR mode to test system operations, such as
monitoring CPM2C operating status, force-setting and resetting I/O bits, changing the SV/PV of timers and counters, changing word data, and online editing.
RUN Mode
This is the CPM2C’s normal operating mode. The CPM2C’s operating status
can be monitored from a Programming Device, but bits can’t be force-set/forcereset and the SV/PV of timers and counters can’t be changed.
! Caution
Check the system thoroughly before changing the operating mode of the PC to
prevent any accidents that might occur when the program is first started.
! Caution
Never change the mode while pressing any of the keys.
119
Section
Using a Programming Console
4-3
The operating mode of the CPM2C when the power is turned ON depends upon
the PC Setup setting in DM 6600 and the Programming Console’s mode switch
setting if the Programming Console is connected.
Startup Operating Mode
PC Setup setting
(DM 6600)
0000
0200
Programming Console not
connected
RUN mode if no Programming Device
is connected. PROGRAM mode if
another Programming Device is
connected.
The startup mode is the same as the operating mode before
power was interrupted.
PROGRAM mode
0201
MONITOR mode
0202
RUN mode
0100
Programming
Console connected
The startup mode
determined by the
mode switch setting.
Note The default setting is 0000. If a Programming Console is not connected, the PC
will automatically enter RUN mode. Be sure that it is safe for the PC to operate
before turning on the PC without a Programming Console connected.
4-3-4 Preparation for Operation
This section describes the procedures required to begin Programming Console
operation when using the Programming Console for the first time.
! Caution
Always confirm that the Programming Console is in PROGRAM mode when
turning ON the PC with a Programming Console connected unless another
mode is desired for a specific purpose. If the Programming Console is in RUN
mode when PC power is turned ON, any program in Program Memory will be
executed, possibly causing a PC-controlled system to begin operation.
The following sequence of operations must be performed before beginning initial program input.
1, 2, 3...
1. Be sure that the PC is OFF.
2. Connect the Programming Console to the CPU Unit’s communications port
(peripheral port). See 4-3-1 Connecting the Programming Console for
details.
(The CPU Unit’s Communications Switch setting has no effect on communications with the Programming Console.)
3. Set the mode switch to PROGRAM mode.
4. Turn ON the PC.
5. Enter the password. See 4-3-5 Entering the Password for details.
6. Clear (All Clear) the PC’s memory. See 4-4-2 Clearing Memory for details.
7. Read and clear all errors and messages. See 4-4-3 Reading/Clearing Error
Messages for details.
8. Start programming.
4-3-5 Entering the Password
To gain access to the PC’s programming functions, you must first enter the password. The password prevents unauthorized access to the program.
The PC prompts you for a password when PC power is turned on or, if PC power
is already on, after the Programming Console has been connected to the PC. To
gain access to the system when the “Password!” message appears, press CLR
and then MONTR. Then press CLR to clear the display.
120
Section
Using a Programming Console
4-3
If the Programming Console is connected to the PC when PC power is already
on, the first display below will indicate the mode the PC was in before the Programming Console was connected. Ensure that the PC is in PROGRAM mode
before you enter the password. When the password is entered, the PC will
shift to the mode set on the mode switch, causing PC operation to begin if the
mode is set to RUN or MONITOR. The mode can be changed to RUN or MONITOR with the mode switch after entering the password.
PASSWORD!
BZ
Indicates the mode set by the mode selector switch.
121
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
4-4
Programming Console Operations
4-4-1 Overview
The following table lists the programming and monitoring operations that can be
performed from a Programming Console. Refer to the rest of this section for
details on operational procedures.
Name
Clearing memory
Function
Page
Clears all or part of the Program Memory and any data areas that are not
read-only, as well as the contents of the Programming Console’s memory.
Displays and clears error messages and displays MESSAGE instruction
messages.
Turns on and off the buzzer that sounds when Programming Console keys
are pressed.
Reads or changes the function codes assigned to expansion instructions
123
Sets the specified program memory address when reading, writing,
inserting and deleting programs.
Reads the contents of the Program Memory. Displays the status of the
currently displayed bit in PROGRAM and MONITOR modes.
Finds occurrences of the specified instruction in the program.
126
Bit operand search
Finds occurrences of the specified operand bit in the program.
130
Inserting and deleting
instructions
Entering or editing programs
Inserts or deletes instructions from the program.
131
126
Multiple address monitor
Overwrites the contents of the current Program Memory to either input a
program for the first time or to change a program that already exists.
Checks for programming errors and displays the program address and
error when errors are found.
Monitors the status of up to 16 bits and words, although only 3 can be
shown on the display at one time.
Monitors the status of up to 6 bits and words simultaneously.
Differentiation monitor
Monitors the up or down differentiation status of a particular bit.
134
Binary monitor
Monitors the ON/OFF status of any word’s 16 bits.
135
3-word monitor
Monitors the status of three consecutive words.
136
Signed decimal monitor
Converts the contents of the specified word from signed hexadecimal
(two’s complement format) to signed decimal for display.
Converts hexadecimal data in a word to unsigned decimal for display.
136
137
Changing timer, counter SV 1
Changes the contents of one or more of the 3 consecutive words
displayed in the 3-Word Monitor operation.
Changes the SV of a timer or counter.
Changing timer, counter SV 2
Makes fine adjustment changes to the SV of the timer or counter.
139
Hexadecimal, BCD data
modification
Binary data modification
Changes the BCD or hexadecimal value of a word being monitored.
139
Changes the status of a word’s bits when the word is being monitored.
140
Signed decimal data
modification
Changes the decimal value of a word being monitored as signed decimal
data, within a range of –32,768 to 32,767. The contents of the specified
word are converted automatically to signed hexadecimal (two’s
complement format.)
Changes the decimal value of a word being monitored as unsigned
decimal data, within a range of 0 to 65,535. A change into hexadecimal
data is made automatically.
140
Force set/reset
Forces bits ON (force set) or OFF (force reset.)
142
Clear force set/reset
Restores the status of all bits which have been force set of reset.
143
Hex-ASCII display change
Converts word data displays back and forth between 4-digit hexadecimal
data and ASCII.
143
Reading/clearing error
messages
Buzzer operation
Assigning expansion
instruction function codes
Setting a program memory
address
Reading a program memory
address
Instruction search
Checking the program
Bit, digit, word monitor
Unsigned decimal monitor
3-word data modification
Unsigned decimal data
modification
122
124
124
125
126
129
132
132
134
137
138
141
Section
Programming Console Operations
Name
Function
4-4
Page
Displaying the cycle time
Displays the current average cycle time (scan time.)
144
Reading and setting the clock
Reads or sets the internal clock.
144
4-4-2 Clearing Memory
This operation is used to clear all or part of the Program Memory and data areas,
as well as the contents of the Programming Console’s memory. This operation is
possible in PROGRAM mode only.
RUN
MONITOR
No
No
PROGRAM
OK
Before beginning to program for the first time or when installing a new program,
clear all areas.
All Clear
The following procedure is used to clear memory completely, including the program, all data areas, counter PVs, Data Memory, and the PC Setup (DM 6600 to
DM 6655).
1, 2, 3...
1. Bring up the initial display by pressing the CLR Key repeatedly.
2. Press the SET, NOT, and then the RESET Key to begin the operation.
SET
NOT
RESET
00000MEMORY CLR?
HR
CNT DM
3. Press the MONTR Key to clear memory completely.
MONTR
! Caution
Partial Clear
00000MEMORY CLR
END HR
CNT DM
The PC Setup (DM 6600 through DM 6655) will be cleared when this operation is
performed.
It is possible to retain the data in specified areas or part of the Program Memory.
To retain the data in the HR, TC, or DM Areas, press the appropriate key after
pressing SET, NOT, and RESET. Any data area that still appears on the display
will be cleared when the MONTR Key is pressed.
The HR Key is used to specify both the AR and HR Areas, the CNT Key is used to
specify the entire timer/counter area, and the DM Key is used to specify the DM
Area.
It is also possible to retain a portion of the Program Memory from the first
memory address to a specified address. After designating the data areas to
be retained, specify the first Program Memory address to be cleared. For
example, input 030 to leave addresses 000 to 029 untouched, but to clear
addresses from 030 to the end of Program Memory.
As an example, follow the procedure below to retain the timer/counter area and
Program Memory addresses 000 through 122:
1, 2, 3...
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Press the SET, NOT, and then the RESET Key to begin the operation.
3. Press the CNT Key to remove the timer/counter area from the data areas
shown on the display. (Counter PVs will not be cleared.)
CNT
00000MEMORY CLR?
HR
DM
4. Press 123 to specify 123 as the starting program address.
B
1
C
2
D
3
00123MEMORY CLR?
HR
DM
123
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
5. Press the MONTR Key to clear the specified regions of memory.
MONTR
00000MEMORY CLR
END HR
DM
4-4-3 Reading/Clearing Error Messages
This operation is used to display and clear error messages. It is possible to display and clear non-fatal errors and MESSAGE instruction messages in any
mode, but fatal errors can be cleared in PROGRAM mode only.
RUN
MONITOR
OK
OK
PROGRAM
OK
Before inputting a new program, any error messages recorded in memory
should be cleared. It is assumed here that the causes of any of the errors for
which error messages appear have already been taken care of. If the buzzer
sounds when an attempt is made to clear an error message, eliminate the
cause of the error, and then clear the error message. (Refer to Section 5 Test
Runs and Error Processing for troubleshooting information.)
Key Sequence
Follow the procedure below to display and clear messages.
1, 2, 3...
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Press the FUN and then the MONTR Key to begin the operation. If there are
no messages, the following display will appear:
FUN
MONTR
ERR/MSG CHK OK
If there are messages, the most serious message will be displayed when the
MONTR Key is pressed. Pressing MONTR again will clear the present message and display the next most serious error message. Continue pressing
MONTR until all messages have been cleared. These are some examples
of error messages:
A memory error:
MONTR
MEMORY ERR
A system error:
MONTR
SYS FAIL FAL01
A message (displayed with MSG(46)):
MONTR
MATERIAL USED UP
All messages cleared:
MONTR
ERR/MSG CHK OK
4-4-4 Buzzer Operation
This operation is used to turn on and off the buzzer that sounds when Programming Console keys are pressed. This buzzer will also sound whenever an error
occurs during PC operation. Buzzer operation for errors is not affected by this
setting.
This operation is possible in any mode.
RUN
OK
124
MONITOR
OK
PROGRAM
OK
Section
Programming Console Operations
Key Sequence
4-4
Follow the procedure below to turn the key-input buzzer on and off.
1, 2, 3...
1. Press the CLR, SHIFT, and then the CLR Key to bring up the mode display.
In this case the PC is in PROGRAM mode and the buzzer is ON.
CLR
SHIFT
CLR
BZ
2. Press the SHIFT and then the 1 Key to turn off the buzzer.
SHIFT
B
1
The buzzer will not sound
when “BZ” is not displayed.
3. Press the SHIFT and then the 1 Key again to turn the buzzer back ON.
SHIFT
B
1
BZ
4-4-5 Assigning Expansion Instruction Function Codes
This operation is used to display or change the expansion instructions assigned
to expansion instruction function codes. The assignments can be displayed in
any mode, but can be changed in PROGRAM mode only.
Operation
RUN
MONITOR
PROGRAM
Read assignment
OK
OK
OK
Change assignment
No
No
OK
Assign expansion instruction function codes before inputting the program.
The CPM2C will not operate properly if expansion instructions aren’t assigned correctly. An expansion instruction can be assigned to one function
code only.
The PC Setup must be set for user-defined expansion instruction assignments. Set bits 8 to 11 of DM 6602 to 1 and turn the PC’s power off and then
on again to enable the new setting.
There is a table on page 105 showing the default function code assignments
in the CPM2C.
1, 2, 3...
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Press the EXT Key to display the assignment for the first function code (17).
EXT
INST TBL
READ
FUN017:ASFT
3. Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the expansion instruction function codes.
↓
INST TBL
READ
FUN018:FUN
4. Press the CHG Key to assign a different expansion instruction to the selected function code.
CHG
INST TBL
CHG?
FUN018:FUN ~????
5. Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the expansion instructions that can be assigned to the selected function code.
↓
INST TBL
CHG?
FUN018:FUN ~HEX
125
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
6. Press the WRITE Key to assign the displayed instruction to the function
code.
WRITE
INST TBL
READ
FUN018:HEX
4-4-6 Setting and Reading a Program Memory Address and Monitoring
I/O Bit Status
This operation is used to display the specified program memory address and is
possible in any mode. In the RUN or MONITOR mode, the I/O bit status of bits in
the program will be displayed.
RUN
MONITOR
OK
OK
PROGRAM
OK
When inputting a program for the first time, it is generally written to Program
Memory starting from address 000. Because this address appears when the
display is cleared, it is not necessary to specify it.
When inputting a program starting from other than 000 or to read or modify a
program that already exists in memory, the desired address must be designated.
1, 2, 3...
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Input the desired address. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.
C
2
A
0
A
0
00200
3. Press the Down Arrow Key.
↓
00200READ
LD
OFF
00000
In the RUN or MONITOR
mode, ON/OFF status of
the bit will be displayed.
Pressing the MONTR Key will change to the I/O monitor display. Bits can be
force-set or force-reset from the I/O monitor display. Press the CLR Key to
return to I/O bit status monitoring of the initial address.
Note The ON/OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown if the PC is in
RUN or MONITOR mode.
4. Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the program.
↓
00201READ
AND
ON
00001
↑
00200READ
LD
OFF
00000
4-4-7 Entering or Editing Programs
This operation is used enter or edit programs. It is possible in PROGRAM mode
only.
RUN
No
MONITOR
No
PROGRAM
OK
The same procedure is used to either input a program for the first time or to
change a program that already exists. In either case, the current contents of
Program Memory is overwritten.
126
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
The program shown in the following diagram will be entered to demonstrate
this operation.
00002
Address
TIM 000
#0123
12.3 s
Instruction
00200
00201
LD
TIM
00202
MOV(021)
Operands
IR
00002
000
#0123
MOV(021)
#0100
#0100
10
LR 10
LR
00203
ADB(050)
ADB(050)
#0100
#FFF6
DM 0000
#0100
#FFF6
DM 0000
1, 2, 3...
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Specify the address where the program will begin.
3. Input the address where the program will begin and press the Down Arrow
Key. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.
C
2
A
0
A
0
↓
00200READ
NOP (000)
4. Input the first instruction and operand.
LD
C
2
00200
LD
00002
5. Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory. The next
program address will be displayed.
WRITE
00201READ
NOP (000)
If a mistake was made inputting the instruction, press the Up Arrow Key to
return to the previous program address and input the instruction again. The
mistaken instruction will be overwritten
To specify the Completion Flag for a timer or counter, press the LD, AND,
OR, or NOT Key followed by the TIM or CNT Key, and then input the timer/
counter number last.
6. Input the second instruction and operand. (In this case it isn’t necessary to
enter the timer number, because it’s 000.) Press the WRITE Key to write the
instruction to Program Memory.
Timer number
TIM
WRITE
00201 TIM DATA
#0000
7. Input the second operand (123 to specify 12.3 seconds) and press the
WRITE Key. The next program address will be displayed.
B
1
C
2
D
3
WRITE
00202READ
NOP (000)
If a mistake was made inputting the operand, press the Up Arrow Key to
return to display the mistaken operand and input the operand again.
Note a) Counters are input in the same basic way as timers except the
CNT Key is pressed instead of the TIM Key.
b) Timer and counter SVs are input in BCD, so it isn’t necessary to
press the CONT/# Key.
127
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
8. Input the third instruction and its operands. First input the instruction by
pressing the FUN Key and then the function code (21 in this case).
FUN
C
2
B
1
00202
MOV (021)
To input the differentiated version of an instruction, press the NOT Key after
the function code (FUN 2 1 NOT). The “@” symbol will be displayed next to
differentiated instructions. Press the NOT Key again to change back the
instruction back to a non-differentiated instruction. The “@” symbol will disappear.
To change an instruction after it has been entered, simply scroll through the
program until the desired instruction is displayed and press the NOT Key.
The “@” symbol should be displayed next to the instruction.
9. Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory. The input
display for the first operand will be displayed.
WRITE
00202 MOV DATA A
000
• Writing Hexadecimal, BCD Constant
10. Input the first operand.
The operands of MOV (21) are normally word addresses, but a constant can
be input by pressing the CONT/# Key first. When the CONT/# Key is
pressed, the display will change to “#0000,” indicating that a constant can be
entered.
CONT
#
B
1
A
0
A
0
00202 MOV DATA A
#0100
Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory. The input
display for the second operand will appear.
WRITE
00202 MOV DATA B
000
Note The operands of MOV(21) can be word addresses, so the CONT/#
Key must be pressed to input a constant.
• Writing a Word Address
11. Input the second operand.
*EM
B
LR
1
A
0
00202 MOV DATA B
LR
10
Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory. The next
program address will be displayed.
WRITE
00203READ
NOP (000)
Note When the default display value is “000”, a word address can be input
immediately without pressing the Shift and CH/# Keys.
12. Input the next instruction.
FUN
F
5
A
0
00203
ADB (050)
Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory.
WRITE
00203 ADB DATA A
000
• Writing an Unsigned Decimal Number
128
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
13. The first operand is input as an unsigned integer.
CONT
SHIFT
TR
NOT
#
00203 ADB DATA A
#00000
Input the value of the operand from 0 to 65535.
C
2
F
5
6
00203 ADB DATA A
#00256
Note If an erroneous input is made, press the CLR Key to restore the status
prior to the input. Then enter the correct input.
14. Restore the hexadecimal display.
SHIFT
TR
00203 ADB DATA A
#0100
Note If an input is made outside of the permissible range, a buzzer will
sound and the hexadecimal display will not be displayed.
WRITE
00203 ADB DATA B
000
15. The second operand is input as a signed integer.
CONT
SHIFT
TR
#
00203 ADB DATA B
#+00000
Input the value of the operand from –32,768 to 32,767. Use the SET Key to
input a positive number, and use the RESET Key to input a negative number.
B
RESET
1
A
0
00203 ADB DATA B
#Ć00010
Note If an erroneous input is made, press the CLR Key to restore the status
prior to the input. Then enter the correct input.
16. Restore the hexadecimal display.
SHIFT
TR
00203 ADB DATA B
#FFF6
WRITE
00203 ADB DATA C
000
• Writing a Word Address (DM 0000)
17. Input the final operand and then press the WRITE Key. (It isn’t necessary to
input leading zeroes.)
EM
DM
WRITE
00203 ADB DATA C
DM 0000
00204READ
NOP (000)
4-4-8 Instruction Search
This operation is used to find occurrences of the specified instruction in the program and is possible in any mode.
RUN
OK
MONITOR
OK
PROGRAM
OK
The ON/OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown if the PC is in RUN or
MONITOR mode.
1, 2, 3...
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
129
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
2. Input the address from which the search will begin and press the Down
Arrow Key. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.
B
1
A
0
A
↓
0
00100READ
TIM
001
3. Input the instruction to be found and press the SRCH Key. In this case, the
search is for OUT 01000.
In this case, the next OUT 01000 instruction is at address 200, as shown
below.
OUT
B
1
A
0
A
0
A
0
SRCH
00200SRCH
OUT
01000
4. Press the Down Arrow Key to display the instruction’s operands or press the
SRCH Key to search for the next occurrence of the instruction.
5. The search will continue until an END instruction or the end of Program
Memory is reached. In this case, an END instruction was reached at
address 397.
Indicates the address
of END instruction.
SRCH
00397SRCH
END (001)00.4KW
Indicates the amount used by the user
program in units of 0.1 Kwords.
4-4-9 Bit Operand Search
This operation is used to find occurrences of the specified operand bit in the program and is possible in any mode.
RUN
MONITOR
OK
OK
PROGRAM
OK
The ON/OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown if the PC is in RUN or
MONITOR mode.
1, 2, 3...
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Input the operand address. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.
SHIFT
CONT
#
F
5
00000CONT SRCH
LD
00005
3. Press the SRCH Key to begin the search.
SRCH
00123CONT SRCH
LD
00005
4. Press the SRCH Key to search for the next occurrence of the operand bit.
SRCH
00255CONT SRCH
AND NOT
00005
5. The search will continue until an END instruction or the end of Program
Memory is reached. In this case, an END instruction was reached.
Indicates the address
of END instruction.
SRCH
00397CONT SRCH
END (001)00.4KW
Indicates the amount used by the user
program in units of 0.1 Kwords.
130
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
4-4-10 Inserting and Deleting Instructions
This operation is used to insert or delete instructions from the program. It is possible in PROGRAM mode only.
RUN
MONITOR
No
No
PROGRAM
OK
To demonstrate this operation, an IR 00105 NO condition will be inserted at
program address 00206 and an IR 00103 NO condition deleted from address
00205, as shown in the following diagram.
Original Program
00100
00101
00104
00103
Address
Instruction
00205
00206
00207
00208
AND
AND NOT
OUT
END(01)
Operands
01000
00201
00102
Delete
00105
Delete
Insert
END(01)
Insertion
00103
00104
01000
-
Insert
Follow the procedure below to insert the IR 00105 NO condition at address
00206.
1, 2, 3...
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Input the address where the NO condition will be inserted and press the
Down Arrow Key. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.
C
2
A
0
6
↓
00206READ
AND NOT
00104
3. Input the new instruction and press the INS Key.
AND
B
1
A
0
F
5
INS
00206INSERT?
AND
00105
4. Press the Down Arrow Key to insert the new instruction.
↓
00207INSERT END
AND NOT
00104
Note For instructions that require more operands (such as set values),
input the operands and then press the WRITE Key.
Deletion
Follow the procedure below to delete the IR 00103 NO condition at address
00205.
1, 2, 3...
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Input the address where the NO condition will be deleted and press the
Down Arrow Key. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.
C
2
A
0
F
5
↓
00205READ
AND
00103
3. Press the DEL Key.
DEL
00205DELETE?
AND
00103
4. Press the Up Arrow Key to delete the specified instruction.
If the instruction has more operands, the operands will be deleted automatically with the instruction.
↑
00205 DELETE END
AND
00105
131
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
After completing the insertion and deletion procedures, use the Up and Down
Arrow Keys to scroll through the program and verify that it has been changed
correctly, as shown in the following diagram.
Corrected Program
00100
00101
00105
00104
Address
Instruction
00205
00206
00207
00208
AND
AND NOT
OUT
END(01)
Operands
01000
00201
00102
END(01)
00105
00104
01000
-
4-4-11 Checking the Program
This operation checks for programming errors and displays the program
address and error when errors are found. It is possible in PROGRAM mode
only.
RUN
No
1, 2, 3...
MONITOR
No
PROGRAM
OK
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Press the SRCH Key. An input prompt will appear requesting the desired
check level.
SRCH
00000PROG CHK
CHK LBL
(0Ć2)?
3. Input the desired check level (0, 1, or 2). The program check will begin when
the check level is input, and the first error found will be displayed.
A
0
00178CIRCUIT ERR
OUT
00200
Note Refer to 5-4 Programming Errors for details on check levels and the
errors that may be detected when the program is checked.
4. Press the SRCH Key to continue the search. The next error will be displayed. Continue pressing the SRCH Key to continue the search.
The search will continue until an END instruction or the end of Program
Memory is reached. A display like this will appear if the end of Program
Memory is reached:
SRCH
00300NO END INST
END
A display like this will appear if an END instruction is reached:
SRCH
00310PROG CHK
END (001)00.3KW
No more errors exist if the END
instruction is displayed.
If errors are displayed, edit the program to correct the errors and check the program again. Continue checking the program by pressing the SRCH Key again
until all errors have been corrected.
4-4-12 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor
This operation is used to monitor the status of up to 16 bits and words,
although only 3 can be shown on the display at any one time. Operation is
possible in any mode.
132
Section
Programming Console Operations
RUN
MONITOR
OK
Program Read then Monitor
1, 2, 3...
OK
4-4
PROGRAM
OK
When a program address is being displayed, the status of the bit or word in that
address can be monitored by pressing the MONTR Key.
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Input the desired program address and press the Down Arrow Key.
C
2
A
0
A
↓
0
00200READ
TIM
000
3. Press the MONTR Key to begin monitoring.
MONTR
T000
1234
If the status of a bit is being monitored, that bit’s status can be changed using
the Force Set/Reset operation. Refer to 4-4-24 Force Set, Reset for details.
If the status of a word is being monitored, that word’s value can be changed
using the Hexadecimal/BCD Data Modification operation. Refer to 4-3-19
Hexadecimal, BCD Data Modification, 4-3-20 Binary Data Modification,
4-3-21 Signed Decimal Data Modification, and 4-3-22 Unsigned Decimal
Data Modification for details.
4. Press the CLR Key to end monitoring.
CLR
Bit Monitor
00200
TIM
000
Follow the procedure below to monitor the status of a particular bit.
1, 2, 3...
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Input the bit address of the desired bit and press the MONTR Key.
SHIFT
CONT
#
B
1
MONTR
00001
^
ON
The Up or Down Arrow Key can be pressed to display the status of the previous or next bit.
The displayed bit’s status can be changed using the Force Set/Reset operation. Refer to 4-4-24 Force Set, Reset for details.
3. Press the CLR Key to end monitoring.
CLR
Word Monitor
00000
CONT
00001
Follow the procedure below to monitor the status of a particular word.
1, 2, 3...
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Input the word address of the desired word.
SHIFT
CH
*DM
*EM
LR
B
1
00000
CHANNEL LR
01
3. Press the MONTR Key to begin monitoring.
MONTR
cL01
FFFF
The Up or Down Arrow Key can be pressed to display the status of the previous or next word.
The displayed word’s status can be changed using the Hexadecimal/BCD
Data Modification operation. Refer to Refer to 4 -3-19 Hexadecimal, BCD
Data Modification, 4-3-20 Binary Data Modification, 4-3-21 Singed Decimal
133
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
Data Modification, and 4-3-22 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification for details.
4. Press the CLR Key to end monitoring.
CLR
00000
CHANNEL
LR
01
Note The operating mode can be changed without altering the current monitor display
by holding down the SHIFT Key and then changing the operating mode.
The status of up to six bits and words can be monitored simultaneously, although
only three can be shown on the display at any one time.
Multiple Address
Monitoring
1, 2, 3...
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Input the address of the first bit or word and press the MONTR Key.
TIM
MONTR
T000
0100
3. Repeat step 2 up to 6 times to display the next addresses to be monitored.
SHIFT
CONT
#
1
MONTR
00001 T000
^ OFF 0100
EM
MONTR
D000000001 T000
0000^ OFF 0100
B
DM
If 4 or more bits and words are being monitored, the bits and words that do
not appear on the display can be displayed by pressing the MONTR Key. If
the MONTR Key is pressed alone, the display will shift to the right.
If more than six bits and words are input, monitoring of the bit or word input
first will be canceled.
4. Press the CLR Key to stop monitoring the leftmost bit or word and clear it
from the display.
CLR
00001 T000
^ OFF 0100
5. Press the SHIFT and CLR Keys to end monitoring altogether.
SHIFT
CLR
00000
CONT
00001
Note Press the SHIFT Key, CLR Key, and then CLR Key again to return to the initial
Programming Console display with the multiple address monitoring state
unchanged. Press the SHIFT Key and then the MONTR Key from the initial display to return to the multiple address monitoring state. The monitoring states can
be retained for 6 bits and words.
The operating mode can be changed without altering the current monitor display
by holding down the SHIFT Key and then changing the operating mode.
4-4-13 Differentiation Monitor
This operation is used to monitor the up or down differentiation status of a
particular bit. When detected, the up or down differentiation will be displayed
and the buzzer will sound. It is possible in any mode.
RUN
OK
1, 2, 3...
134
MONITOR
OK
PROGRAM
OK
1. Monitor the status of the desired bit according to the procedure described in
4-4-12 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor. If 2 or more bits are being monitored, the desired bit should be leftmost on the display.
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
In this case the differentiation status of LR 00 will be monitored.
L000000001H0000
^ OFF^ OFF^ OFF
2. To specify up-differentiation monitoring, press the SHIFT and then the Up
Arrow Key. The symbols “U@” will appear.
SHIFT
↑
L000000001H0000
U@OFF^ OFF^ OFF
Indicates waiting for the bit to turn ON.
To specify down-differentiation monitoring, press the SHIFT and then the
Down Arrow Key. The symbols “D@” will appear.
SHIFT
↓
L000000001H0000
D@OFF^ OFF^ OFF
3. The buzzer will sound when the specified bit goes from off to on (for up-differentiation) or from on to off (for down-differentiation).
L000000001H0000
^
ON^ OFF^ OFF
Note The buzzer will not sound if it has been turned off.
4. Press the CLR Key to end differentiation monitoring and return to the normal
monitoring display.
CLR
L000000001H0000
^ OFF^ OFF^ OFF
4-4-14 Binary Monitor
This operation is used to monitor the ON/OFF status of any word’s 16 bits. It
is possible in any mode.
RUN
OK
1, 2, 3...
MONITOR
OK
PROGRAM
OK
1. Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure described
in 4-4-12 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor. The desired word should be leftmost on
the display if 2 or more words are being monitored.
c010
0000
(Word monitor)
2. Press the SHIFT and then the MONTR Key to begin binary monitoring. The
ON/OFF status of the selected word’s 16 bits will be shown along the bottom
of the display. A 1 indicates a bit is on, and a 0 indicates it is off.
SHIFT MONTR
c010 MONTR
0000000000000000
Bit 15
Bit 00
The status of force-set bits is indicated by “S,” and the status of a force-reset
bits is indicated by “R,” as shown below.
c010 MONTR
000S0000000R0000
Force-set bit
Force-reset bit
Note a) The status of displayed bits can be changed at this point. Refer to
4-4-21 Binary Data Modification for details.
135
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
b) The Up or Down Arrow Key can be pressed to display the status of
the previous or next word’s bits.
3. Press the CLR Key to end binary monitoring and return to the normal monitoring display.
CLR
c010
0000
4-4-15 Three-Word Monitor
This operation is used to monitor the status of three consecutive words. It is
possible in any mode.
RUN
OK
1, 2, 3...
MONITOR
OK
PROGRAM
OK
1. Monitor the status of the first of the three words according to the procedure
described in 4-4-12 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor.
If 2 or more words are being monitored, the desired first word should be leftmost on the display.
c200
89AB
(Word monitor)
2. Press the EXT Key to begin 3-word monitoring. The status of the selected
word and the next two words will be displayed, as shown below. In this case,
DM 0000 was selected.
EXT
c202 c201 c200
0123 4567 89AB
The Up and Down Arrow Keys can be used to shift one address up or down.
The status of the displayed words can be changed at this point. Refer to
4-4-18 Three-word Data Modification.
The display can be changed to display ASCII text, which is useful when
three consecutive words containing an ASCII message are displayed. Refer
to 4-4-26 Hex-ASCII Display Change.
3. Press the CLR Key to end 3-word monitoring and return to the normal monitoring display. The rightmost word on the 3-word monitor display will be
monitored.
CLR
c200
89AB
Note The operating mode can be changed without altering the current monitor display
by holding down the SHIFT Key and then changing the operating mode.
4-4-16 Signed Decimal Monitor
This operation converts the contents of the specified word from signed hexadecimal (two’s complement format) to signed decimal for display. The operation can be executed while using I/O monitoring, multiple address monitoring
or 3-word monitoring.
RUN
OK
1, 2, 3...
MONITOR
OK
1. Monitor the word that is to be used for decimal monitor with sign. During multiple address monitoring, the leftmost word will be converted.
(Multiple address monitor)
136
PROGRAM
OK
c200 cL0020000
FFF0 0000^ OFF
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
2. Press the SHIFT+TR Keys to display the leftmost word as signed decimal.
SHIFT
TR
c200
Ć00016
At this point, the contents of the displayed word can be changed with a
signed-decimal input. Refer to 4-4-22 Signed Decimal Data Modification.
3. Press the CLR Key or the SHIFT+TR Keys to end the unsigned decimal display and return to normal monitoring.
CLR
c200 cL0020000
FFF0 0000^ OFF
4-4-17 Unsigned Decimal Monitor
This operation is used to convert hexadecimal data in a word to unsigned
decimal for display. The operation can be executed while using I/O monitoring, multiple address monitoring or 3-word monitoring.
RUN
MONITOR
OK
1, 2, 3...
OK
PROGRAM
OK
1. Monitor the word that is to be used for decimal monitor without sign. During
multiple address monitoring, the leftmost word will be converted.
Multiple address monitoring
c200 cL0020000
FFF0 0000^ OFF
2. Press the SHIFT+TR+NOT Keys to display the leftmost word as unsigned
decimal.
SHIFT
TR
NOT
c200
65520
At this point, the contents of the displayed word can be changed with an unsigned-decimal input. Refer to 4-4-23 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification.
3. Press the CLR Key or the SHIFT+TR Keys to end the unsigned decimal display and return to normal monitoring.
CLR
c200 cL0020000
FFF0 0000^ OFF
4-4-18 Three-Word Data Modification
This operation is used to change the contents of one or more of the 3 consecutive words displayed in the Three-Word Monitor operation. It is possible
in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only.
RUN
No
MONITOR
OK
PROGRAM
OK
! Caution
Before changing the contents of I/O memory, be sure that the changes will not
cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously. In particular, take
care when changing the status of output bits. The PC continues to refresh I/O
bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so devices connected to output points
on the CPU Unit, Expansion Units, or Expansion I/O Units may operate unexpectedly.
1, 2, 3...
1. Monitor the status of the desired words according to the procedure described 4-4-15 Three-Word Monitor.
(Three-word monitor)
D0002D0001D0000
0123 4567 89AB
137
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
2. Press the CHG Key to begin 3-word data modification. The cursor will appear next to the contents of the leftmost word.
CHG
D0002
3CH CHG?
00123 4567 89AB
3. Input the new value for the leftmost word on the display and press the CHG
Key if more changes will be made.
(Input the new value and press the WRITE Key to write the changes in
memory if no more changes will be made.)
B
1
CHG
D0002
3CH CHG?
0001 4567 89AB
4. Input the new value for the middle word on the display and press the CHG
Key if the rightmost word will be changed. Input the new value and press the
WRITE Key to write the changes in memory if the rightmost word will not be
changed. (In this case, it will not.)
C
2
D
3
E
4
WRITE
D0002D0001D0000
0001 0234 89AB
Note If the CLR Key is pressed before the WRITE Key, the operation will be cancelled
and the 3-word monitor display will return without any changes in data memory.
4-4-19 Changing Timer, Counter SV
There are two operations that can be used to change the SV of a timer or
counter. They are possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only. In MONITOR mode, the SV can be changed while the program is being executed.
RUN
MONITOR
No
OK
PROGRAM
OK
The timer or counter SV can be changed either by inputting a new value or
by incrementing or decrementing the current SV.
This operation can be used to input a new SV constant, as well as to change an
SV from a constant to a word address designation and vice versa. The following
examples show how to input a new SV constant and how to change the SV from
a constant to an address.
Inputting a New SV
Constant
1, 2, 3...
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Display the desired timer or counter.
TIM
B
1
SRCH
00201SRCH
TIM
001
3. Press the Down Arrow Key and then the CHG Key.
↓
CHG
00201DATA?
T001 #0134 #????
4. At this point a new SV constant can be input or the SV constant can be
changed to a word address designation
a) To input a new SV constant, input the constant and press the WRITE
Key.
B
1
C
2
E
4
WRITE
00201 TIM DATA
#0124
b) To change to a word address designation, input the word address and
press the WRITE Key.
SHIFT
138
CH
AR
*DM
HR
B
1
A
0
WRITE
00201 TIM DATA
HR
10
Section
Programming Console Operations
Incrementing and
Decrementing a Constant
1, 2, 3...
4-4
This operation can be used to increment and decrement an SV constant. It is
possible only when the SV has been entered as a constant.
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Display the desired timer or counter.
TIM
SRCH
00201SRCH
TIM
000
3. Press the Down Arrow, CHG, and then the EXT Key.
↓
CHG
EXT
00201DATA ? U/D
T000 #0123 #0123
The constant on the left is the old SV and the constant on the right will become the new SV constant in step 5.
4. Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to increment and decrement the constant on the right. (In this case the SV is incremented once.)
↓
00201DATA ? U/D
T000 #0123 #0124
5. Press the CLR Key twice to change the timer’s SV to the new value.
CLR
CLR
00201 TIM DATA
#0124
4-4-20 Hexadecimal, BCD Data Modification
This operation is used to change the BCD or hexadecimal value of a word
being monitored using the procedure described in 4-4-12 Bit, Digit, Word
Monitor. It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only.
RUN
MONITOR
No
OK
PROGRAM
OK
Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed.
! Caution
Before changing the contents of I/O memory, be sure that the changes will not
cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously. In particular, take
care when changing the status of output bits. The PC continues to refresh I/O
bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so devices connected to output points
on the CPU Unit, Expansion Units, or Expansion I/O Units may operate unexpectedly.
1, 2, 3...
1. Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure described
in 4-4-12 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor. If two or more words are being monitored,
the desired word should be leftmost on the display.
D0000
0119
(Word monitor)
2. Press the CHG Key to begin hexadecimal, BCD data modification.
CHG
PRES VAL?
D0000 0119
????
3. Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV.
The operation will end and the normal monitoring display will return when
the WRITE Key is pressed.
C
2
A
0
A
0
WRITE
D0000
0200
139
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
4-4-21 Binary Data Modification
This operation is used to change the status of a word’s bits when the word is
monitored using the procedure described in 4-4-14 Binary Monitor. It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only.
RUN
MONITOR
No
OK
PROGRAM
OK
Bits SR 25300 to SR 25507 and timer/counter flags cannot be changed.
! Caution
Before changing the contents of I/O memory, be sure that the changes will not
cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously. In particular, take
care when changing the status of output bits. The PC continues to refresh I/O
bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so devices connected to output points
on the CPU Unit, Expansion Units, or Expansion I/O Units may operate unexpectedly.
1, 2, 3...
1. Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure described
4-4-14 Binary Monitor.
c010 MONTR
1000010101010101
(BInary monitor)
Bit 15
Bit 00
2. Press the CHG Key to begin binary data modification.
CHG
c010
CHG?
1000010101010101
A flashing cursor will appear over bit 15. The cursor indicates which bit can
be changed.
3. Three sets of keys are used to move the cursor and change bit status:
a) Use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to move the cursor to the left and right.
↓
↓
c010
CHG?
1000010101010101
b) Use the 1 and 0 Keys to change a bit’s status to on or off. The cursor will
move one bit to the right after one of these keys is pressed.
B
1
c010
CHG?
1010010101010101
c) Use the SHIFT+SET and SHIFT+RESET Keys to force-set or force-reset a bit’s status. The cursor will move one bit to the right after one of
these keys is pressed. The NOT Key will clear force-set or force-reset
status.
Note Bits in the DM Area cannot be force-set or force-reset.
4. Press the WRITE Key to write the changes in memory and return to the
binary monitor.
WRITE
c010
MONTR
1010010101010101
4-4-22 Signed Decimal Data Modification
This operation is used to change the decimal value of a word being monitored as signed decimal data, within a range of –32,768 to 32,767. The contents of the specified word are converted automatically to signed hexadecimal (two’s complement format).
140
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed.
RUN
MONITOR
No
PROGRAM
OK
OK
! Caution
Before changing the contents of I/O memory, be sure that the changes will not
cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously. In particular, take
care when changing the status of output bits. The PC continues to refresh I/O
bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so devices connected to output points
on the CPU Unit, Expansion Units, or Expansion I/O Units may operate unexpectedly.
1, 2, 3...
1. Monitor (signed decimal) the status of the word for which the present value
is to be changed.
D0200
Ć00016
(Signed decimal monitor)
2. Press the CHG Key to begin decimal data modification.
CHG
PRES VAL?
D0200Ć00016
3. Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV. The operation
will end and the signed-decimal monitoring display will return when the
WRITE Key is pressed.
The PV can be set within a range of –32,768 and 32,767. Use the SET Key to
input a positive number, and use the RESET Key to input a negative number.
D
RESET
3
C
2
7
6
WRITE
8
D0200
Ć32768
If an erroneous input has been made, press the CLR Key to restore the status prior to the input. Then enter the correct input.
The buzzer will sound if a value outside the specified range is input, allowing
no writing.
4-4-23 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification
This operation is used to change the decimal value of a word being monitored as unsigned decimal data, within a range of 0 to 65,535. A change into
hexadecimal data is made automatically.
Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed.
RUN
No
MONITOR
OK
PROGRAM
OK
! Caution
Before changing the contents of I/O memory, be sure that the changes will not
cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously. In particular, take
care when changing the status of output bits. The PC continues to refresh I/O
bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so devices connected to output points
on the CPU Unit, Expansion Units, or Expansion I/O Units may operate unexpectedly.
1, 2, 3...
1. Monitor (unsigned decimal) the status of the word for which the present value is to be changed.
c200
65520
(Unsigned decimal monitor)
2. Press the CHG Key to begin decimal data modification.
141
Section
Programming Console Operations
CHG
4-4
PRES VAL?
c200 65520
3. Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV. The operation
will end and the decimal-without-sign monitoring display will return when the
WRITE Key is pressed.
The PV can be set within a range of 0 to 65,535.
D
3
C
2
7
6
8
WRITE
c200
32768
If an erroneous input has been made, press the CLR Key to restore the status prior to the input. Then enter the correct input.
The buzzer will sound if a value outside the specified range is input, allowing
no writing.
4-4-24 Force Set, Reset
This operation is used to force bits ON (force set) or OFF (force reset) and is
useful when debugging the program or checking output wiring. It is possible
in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only.
RUN
No
MONITOR
OK
PROGRAM
OK
! Caution
Before changing the contents of I/O memory, be sure that the changes will not
cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously. In particular, take
care when changing the status of output bits. The PC continues to refresh I/O
bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so devices connected to output points
on the CPU Unit, Expansion Units, or Expansion I/O Units may operate unexpectedly.
1, 2, 3...
1. Monitor the status of the desired bit according to the procedure described in
4-4-12 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor. If two or more words are being monitored,
the desired bit should be leftmost on the display.
0000020000
^ OFF^
ON
(Multiple address monitor)
2. Press the SET Key to force the bit ON or press the RESET Key to force the
bit OFF.
SET
0000020000
ON^
ON
The cursor in the lower left corner of the display indicates that the force set/
reset is in progress. Bit status will remain ON or OFF only as long as the key
is held down; the original status will return one cycle after the key is released.
3. Press the SHIFT and SET Keys or SHIFT and RESET Keys to maintain the
status of the bit after the key is released. In this case, the force-set status is
indicated by an “S” and the force-reset status is indicated by an “R.”
To return the bit to its original status, press the NOT Key or perform the Clear
Force Set/Reset operation. Refer to 4-4-25 Clear Force Set/Reset for details.
Forced status will also be cleared in the following cases:
a) When the PC’s operating mode is changed (although the forced status
will not be cleared when the mode is changed from PROGRAM to MONITOR if SR 25211 is ON)
b) When the PC stops because a fatal error occurred
142
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
c) When the PC stops because of a power interruption
d) When the Clear Force Set/Reset Operation is performed
4-4-25 Clear Force Set/Reset
This operation is used to restore the status of all bits which have been force
set or reset. It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only.
RUN
No
MONITOR
OK
PROGRAM
OK
! Caution
Before changing the contents of I/O memory, be sure that the changes will not
cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously. In particular, take
care when changing the status of output bits. The PC continues to refresh I/O
bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so devices connected to output points
on the CPU Unit, Expansion Units, or Expansion I/O Units may operate unexpectedly.
1, 2, 3...
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Press the SET and then the RESET Key. A confirmation message will appear.
SET
RESET
00000FORCE RELE?
Note If you mistakenly press the wrong key, press CLR and start again
from the beginning.
3. Press the NOT Key to clear the force-set/reset status of bits in all data areas.
NOT
00000FORCE RELE
END
4-4-26 Hex-ASCII Display Change
This operation is used to convert word data displays back and forth between
4-digit hexadecimal data and ASCII. It is possible in any mode.
The displayed PV of the timer or counter cannot be changed.
RUN
OK
1, 2, 3...
MONITOR
OK
PROGRAM
OK
1. Monitor the status of the desired word(s) according to the procedure described in 4-4-12 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor. While the multiple addresses are
being monitored, the leftmost word is subject to change.
D0000D0001
4142 3031
(Multiple address monitor)
2. Press the TR Key to switch to ASCII display. The display will toggle between
hexadecimal and ASCII displays each time the TR Key is pressed.
Note
TR
D0000 D0001
"AB"
3031
TR
D0000D0001
4142 3031
1. A message contained in three words can be displayed by using ASCII display in combination with the Three-word monitor operation.
2. The Hexadecimal, BCD Data Modification Operation can be used while displaying ASCII data. Input values in 4-digit hexadecimal.
143
Section
Programming Console Operations
4-4
4-4-27 Displaying the Cycle Time
This operation is used to display the current average cycle time (scan time).
It is possible only in RUN or MONITOR mode while the program is being
executed.
RUN
MONITOR
OK
1, 2, 3...
OK
PROGRAM
No
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Press the MONTR Key to display the cycle time.
MONTR
00000SCAN TIME
012.1MS
“MS” in the display indicates
the unit “ms” for the cycle time.
There might be differences in displayed values when the MONTR Key is
pressed repeatedly. These differences are caused by changing execution
conditions.
4-4-28 Reading and Setting the Clock
This operation is used to read or set the CPU’s clock. The clock can be read in
any mode, but can be set in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only.
Operation
1, 2, 3...
RUN
MONITOR
PROGRAM
Read clock
OK
OK
OK
Set clock
No
OK
OK
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
2. Press the FUN Key, SHIFT Key, and then the MONTR Key to display the
date and time.
FUN
SHIFT MONTR
TIM
99Ć02Ć22
11:04:32
MON(1)
3. Press the CHG Key to change the date and/or time.
CHG
TIM CHG?99Ć02Ć22
11:04:32
MON(1)
The digit that can be changed will flash. If necessary, input a new value with
the Up and Down Arrow Keys or Numeric Keys. Press the CHG Key to move
the cursor to the next digit. The following table shows the setting ranges for
each value.
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
Day-of-week
00 to 99
01 to 12
01 to 31
00 to 23
00 to 59
00 to 59
0 to 6
(SUN to SAT)
4. Press the WRITE Key to write the new value.
WRITE
INST TBL
READ
FUN018:HEX
Press the CLR Key to return to the initial display.
144
Section
Programming Example
4-5
4-5
Programming Example
This section demonstrates all of the steps needed to write a program with the
Programming Console.
4-5-1 Preparatory Operations
Use the following procedure when writing a program to the CPM2C for the first
time.
1, 2, 3...
1. Set the Programming Console’s mode switch to PROGRAM mode and turn
on the CPM2C’s power supply. The password input display will appear on
the Programming Console.
MONITOR
RUN
PROGRAM
PASSWORD!
2. Enter the password by pressing the CLR and then the MONTR Key.
CLR
MONTR
BZ
3. Clear the CPM2C’s memory by pressing the CLR, SET, NOT, RESET, and
then the MONTR Key. Press the CLR Key several times if memory errors are
displayed.
CLR
SET
NOT
RESET
MONTR
00000
00000MEMORY CLR?
HR
CNT DM
00000MEMORY CLR
END HR
CNT DM
4. Display and clear error messages by pressing the CLR, FUN, and then the
MONTR Key. Continue pressing the MONTR Key until all error messages
have been cleared.
CLR
FUN
MONTR
00000
00000
FUN (0??)
ERR/MSG CHK OK
5. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial programming display (program address 00000). The new program can be written at this point.
CLR
! Caution
00000
Check the system thoroughly before starting or stopping the CPM2C to prevent
any accidents that might occur when the program is first started.
145
Section
Programming Example
4-5
4-5-2 Example Program
The following ladder program will be used to demonstrate how to write a program with the Programming Console. This program makes output IR 01000
flicker ON/OFF (one second ON, one second OFF) ten times after input
IR 00000 is turned ON.
Start input
00000
C000
20000
00000
Self-holding bit
20000
20000
T002
00004
TIM 001
#0010
20000
1-second timer
T002
00007
TIM 002
#0020
20000
T001
Count input
2-second timer
CP
00010
CNT 000
10-count counter
20000
#0010
R
Reset input
20000
T001
Flicker output (10 counts)
01000
00014
ON
OFF
END(01)
00017
1S
The mnemonic list for the example program is shown in the following table. The
steps required to enter this program from a Programming Console are described
in 4-5-3 Programming Procedures.
Address
Instruction
Data
00000
LD
00000
00001
OR
20000
00002
AND NOT
00003
OUT
00004
LD
00005
AND NOT
00006
TIM
00007
LD
00008
AND NOT
00009
TIM
C
00011
AND
00012
LD NOT
00013
CNT
(2) 1-second timer
002
001
0010
20000
T
(3) 2-second timer
002
002
0020
20000
T
(4) 10-count counter
001
20000
000
#
146
000
20000
T
#
LD
(1) Self-holding bit
20000
#
00010
Programming example
procedures in 4-5-3
Programming Procedures
0010
00014
LD
00015
AND NOT
20000
00016
OUT
01000
00017
END (01)
---
T
(5) Flicker output (10 counts)
001
(6) END(01) instruction
Section
Programming Example
4-5
4-5-3 Programming Procedures
The example program will be written to the CPM2C according to the mnemonic
list in 4-5-2 Example Program. The procedure is performed beginning with the
initial display. (Clear the memory before entering a new program.)
Note If an error occurs while inputting the program, refer to 5-3 Programming Console
Operation Errors for details on correcting the error. Refer to the relevant Support
Software Operation Manual for details on errors that appear when operating the
SSS or SYSMAC-CPT Support Software.
(1) Inputting the Self-holding Bit
1, 2, 3...
1. Input the normally open condition IR 00000.
(It isn’t necessary to input leading zeroes.)
LD
WRITE
00000
LD
00000
00001READ
NOP (000)
2. Input the OR condition IR 20000.
OR
C
2
A
0
A
0
A
0
A
0
WRITE
00001
OR
20000
00002READ
NOP (000)
3. Input the normally closed AND condition C000.
(It isn’t necessary to input leading zeroes.)
AND
NOT
CNT
WRITE
00002
AND NOT
CNT 000
00003READ
NOP (000)
4. Input the OUT instruction IR 20000.
OUT
C
2
A
0
A
0
A
0
A
0
WRITE
00003
OUT
20000
00004READ
NOP (000)
(2) Inputting the One-second Timer
1, 2, 3...
LD
1. Input the normally open condition IR 20000.
C
2
A
0
A
0
A
0
A
0
WRITE
00004
LD
20000
00005READ
NOP (000)
2. Input the normally closed AND condition T002.
(It isn’t necessary to input leading zeroes.)
AND
NOT
TIM
C
2
WRITE
00005
AND NOT
TIM 002
00006READ
NOP (000)
147
Section
Programming Example
3. Input the 1-second timer T001.
TIM
B
1
WRITE
00006
TIM
001
00006 TIM DATA
#0000
4. Input the SV for T001 (#0010 = 1.0 s).
B
1
A
0
WRITE
(3) Inputting the
Two-second Timer
00006 TIM DATA
#0010
00007READ
NOP (000)
The following key operations are used to input the 2-second timer.
1, 2, 3...
LD
1. Input the normally open condition IR 20000.
C
2
A
0
A
0
A
0
A
0
WRITE
00007
LD
20000
00008READ
NOP (000)
2. Input the normally closed AND condition T002.
(It isn’t necessary to input leading zeroes.)
AND
NOT
TIM
C
2
WRITE
00008
AND NOT
TIM 002
00009READ
NOP (000)
3. Input the 2-second timer T002.
TIM
C
2
WRITE
00009
TIM
002
00009 TIM DATA
#0000
4. Input the SV for T002 (#0020 = 2.0 s).
C
2
A
0
WRITE
(4) Inputting the 10-count
Counter
1, 2, 3...
LD
00009 TIM DATA
#0020
00010READ
NOP (000)
The following key operations are used to input the 10-count counter.
1. Input the normally open condition IR 20000.
C
2
A
0
A
0
A
0
A
0
WRITE
00010
LD
20000
00011READ
NOP (000)
2. Input the normally open AND condition T001.
(It isn’t necessary to input leading zeroes.)
AND
TIM
B
1
WRITE
148
00011
AND
TIM 001
00012READ
NOP (000)
4-5
Section
Programming Example
4-5
3. Input the normally closed condition IR 20000.
LD
C
NOT
2
A
0
A
0
A
0
A
0
WRITE
00012
LD NOT
20000
00013READ
NOP (000)
4. Input the counter 000.
CNT
A
0
WRITE
00013
CNT
000
00013 CNT DATA
#0000
5. Input the SV for counter 000 (#0010 = 10 counts).
B
1
A
0
WRITE
00013 CNT DATA
#0010
00014READ
NOP (000)
(5) Inputting the Flicker Output
1, 2, 3...
LD
1. Input the normally open condition IR 20000.
C
2
A
0
A
0
A
0
A
0
WRITE
000014
LD
20000
00015READ
NOP (000)
2. Input the normally closed AND condition T001.
(It isn’t necessary to input leading zeroes.)
AND
NOT
TIM
B
1
WRITE
00015
AND NOT
TIM 001
00016READ
NOP (000)
3. Input the OUT instruction IR 01000.
(It isn’t necessary to input leading zeroes.)
OUT
B
1
A
0
A
0
A
0
WRITE
(6) Inputting the END(001)
Instruction
00016
OUT
01000
00017READ
NOP (000)
Input END(01). (The display shows three digits in the function code, but only the
last two digits are input for CPM2C PCs.)
FUN
A
0
00017
FUN (0??)
1
00017
END (001)
WRITE
00018READ
NOP (000)
B
149
Section
Programming Example
4-5
4-5-4 Checking the Program
Check the program syntax in PROGRAM mode to make sure that the program
has been input correctly.
1, 2, 3...
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
CLR
00000
2. Press the SRCH Key. An input prompt will appear requesting the desired
check level.
SRCH
00000PROG CHK
CHK LBL
(0Ć2)?
3. Input the desired check level (0, 1, or 2). The program check will begin when
the check level is input, and the first error found will be displayed. If no errors
are found, the following display will appear.
A
0
00017PROG CHK
END (001)00.1KW
Note Refer to 5-4 Programming Errors for details on check levels and the
programming errors that may be displayed during a program check.
4. Press the SRCH Key to continue the search. The next error will be displayed. Continue pressing the SRCH Key to continue the search.
The search will continue until an END(01) instruction or the end of Program
Memory is reached.
If errors are displayed, edit the program to correct the errors and check the program again. Continue checking the program until all errors have been corrected.
4-5-5 Test Run in MONITOR Mode
Switch the CPM2C in MONITOR mode and check the operation of the program.
1, 2, 3...
1. Set the Programming Console’s mode switch to MONITOR mode.
MONITOR
RUN
PROGRAM
BZ
2. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.
CLR
00000
3. Force-set the start input bit (IR 00000) from the Programming Console to
start the program.
LD
MONTR
SET
00000
LD
00000
00000
^ OFF
00000
ON
The cursor in the lower left corner of the display indicates that the force set is
in progress. The bit will remain ON as long as the Set Key is held down.
4. The output indicator for output IR 01000 will flash ten times if the program is
operating correctly. The indicator should go OFF after ten one-second
flashes.
There is a mistake in the program if the output indicator doesn’t flash. In this
case, check the program and force set/reset bits to check operation.
150
SECTION 5
Test Runs and Error Processing
This section describes procedures for test runs of CPM2C operation, self-diagnosis functions, and error processing to identify
and correct the hardware and software errors that can occur during PC operation.
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1 Initial System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2 Flash Memory Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-3 CPM2C Test Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-diagnostic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1 Identifying Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2 User-defined Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-3 Non-fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-4 Fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-5 Communications Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Console Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
152
152
152
153
153
154
154
155
155
156
156
158
166
167
151
Section
Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure
5-1
5-1
Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure
5-1-1 Initial System Checks
Check the following items after setting up and wiring the CPM2C, but before performing a test run.
Item
Power supply and
I/O connections
Points to check
Is the wiring correct?
Are the terminals securely tightened?
Are there any shorts between crimp terminals or wires?
Refer to 3-4 Wiring and Connections for details.
Connecting cables
Are the cables all connected correctly and locked?
Refer to 3-4 Wiring and Connections for details.
Protective label
Note
Has the protective label been removed?
1. Always clear memory before beginning to program the CPM2C. Although
memory is cleared before the CPU Unit is shipped, the contents of the DM,
HR, AR, and counter areas may change in transit. See 4-4-2 Clearing
Memory for details on the All Clear operation.
2. See 1-3-3 Operating Mode at Startup to determine what mode the CPM2C
will enter when the power is turned ON.
5-1-2 Flash Memory Precautions
Observe the following precautions to protect the flash memory and ensure
proper operation.
1, 2, 3...
1. If changes are made in the read-only DM area (DM 6144 through DM 6599)
or PC Setup (DM 6600 through DM 6655), the PC’s operating mode must be
changed to write the new contents to flash memory. If backup battery is
changed before the changes are written to flash memory, the changes will
be lost.
The changes can be saved by switching the CPM2C to RUN or MONITOR
mode or turning the CPM2C OFF and then ON again.
2. When contents of the program, read-only DM (DM 6144 through DM 6599),
or PC Setup (DM 6600 through DM 6655) have been changed, startup processing will take up to 1,200 ms longer than usual. Be sure to take this onetime startup delay into account if it may affect operations.
3. If one of the following three operations is performed in MONITOR or RUN
mode, the CPM2C’s cycle time will be extended by up to 1,200 ms and interrupts will be disabled while the program or PC Setup is being overwritten.
• Program changes with the online edit operation
• Changes to the read-only DM area (DM 6144 through DM 6599)
• Changes to the PC Setup (DM 6600 through DM 6655)
A “SCAN TIME OVER” error won’t occur during these operations. Be sure to
take this delay in the CPM2C’s I/O response times into account when performing online editing.
5-1-3 CPM2C Test Run Procedure
1, 2, 3...
1. Power Supply Application
a) Check the CPM2C’s power supply voltage and terminal connections.
b) Check the I/O devices’ power supply voltage and terminal connections.
c) Turn ON the power supply and check that the “PWR” indicator lights.
d) Use a Programming Device to set the CPM2C to PROGRAM mode.
152
Section
Self-diagnostic Functions
5-2
2. I/O Wiring Checks
a) With the CPM2C in PROGRAM mode, check the output wiring by turning
ON the output bits with the force set and force reset operations.
Refer to 4-4-24 Force Set, Reset for details.
b) Check the input wiring with the CPM2C’s input indicators or a Programming Device’s monitor operations.
3. Test Run
a) Use a Programming Device to set the CPM2C to RUN or MONITOR
mode and check that the “RUN” indicator lights.
b) Check the sequence of operation with the force set/reset operations, etc.
4. Debugging
Correct any programming errors that are detected.
5. Saving the Program
a) Use a Programming Device to write the program to a backup floppy disk.
b) Print out a hard copy of the program with a printer.
Note Refer to Section 4 Using Programming Devices for details on the Support Software and Programming Console operations.
5-2
Self-diagnostic Functions
The CPM2C is equipped with a variety of self-diagnostic functions to help identify and correct errors and reduce down time.
5-2-1 Identifying Errors
An error can be identified by the error message displayed on a Programming
Device, error flags in the AR and SR areas, and the error code output to SR 253.
Fatal and Non-fatal
Errors
PC errors are divided into 2 categories based on the severity of the errors. The
status of the ERR/ALM indicator (lit or flashing) shows which type of error has
occurred.
ERR/ALM Lit (Fatal Error)
Fatal errors are serious errors which stop CPM2C operation. There are two
ways to restart operation:
• Turn the PC OFF and then ON again.
• Use a Programming Device to switch the PC to PROGRAM mode, and read/
clear the error.
ERR/ALM Flashing (Non-fatal Error)
Non-fatal errors are less serious errors which don’t stop CPM2C operation.
Error Messages
When an error is detected, a corresponding error message will be displayed on
the Programming Console or other Programming Device connected to the PC.
Error Flags
When a hardware error is detected, the corresponding error flag in the AR or SR
area will be turned ON.
Error Code
When an error is detected, a specific 2-digit hexadecimal error code is output to
SR 25300 to SR 25307. The error code and time of occurrence are also output to
the Error Log Area (DM 2000 to DM 2021).
! WARNING Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits (i.e., not in the
Programmable Controller) to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality
occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor affecting the PC
operation. Not providing proper safety measures may result in serious
accidents.
153
Section
Self-diagnostic Functions
5-2
! WARNING The PC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects any
error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed. External
safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system. Not providing
proper safety measures may result in serious accidents.
5-2-2 User-defined Errors
There are three instructions that can be used to define errors or messages.
FAL(06) causes a non-fatal error, FAL(07) causes a fatal error, and MSG(46)
sends a message to the Programming Console or host computer connected to
the PC.
FAILURE ALARM –
FAL(06)
FAL(06) is an instruction that causes a non-fatal error. The following will occur
when an FAL(06) instruction is executed:
1, 2, 3...
1. The ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash. PC operation will continue.
2. The instruction’s 2-digit BCD FAL number (01 to 99) will be written to
SR 25300 to SR 25307.
The FAL numbers can be set arbitrarily to indicate particular conditions, but the
same number should not be used as both an FAL number and an FALS number.
To clear an FAL error, correct the cause of the error and then execute FAL 00 or
use a Programming Device to clear the error.
SEVERE FAILURE ALARM –
FALS(07)
FALS(07) is an instruction that causes a fatal error. The following will occur when
an FALS(07) instruction is executed:
1, 2, 3...
1. Program execution will be stopped and all outputs will be turned OFF.
2. The ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will be lit.
3. The instruction’s 2-digit BCD FALS number (01 to 99) will be written to
SR 25300 to SR 25307.
The FALS numbers can be set arbitrarily to indicate particular conditions, but the
same number should not be used as both an FAL number and an FALS number.
To clear an FALS error, use a Programming Device to switch the PC to PROGRAM Mode, correct the cause of the error, and then clear the error.
MESSAGE – MSG(46)
MSG(46) is used to display a message on a Programming Device connected to
the CPM2C. The message, which can be up to 16 characters long, is displayed
when the instruction’s execution condition is ON.
5-2-3 Non-fatal Errors
PC operation and program execution will continue after one or more of these
errors have occurred. Although PC operation will continue, the cause of the error
should be corrected and the error cleared as soon as possible.
When one of these errors occurs, the POWER and RUN indicators will remain lit
and the ERR/ALM indicator will flash.
Message
SYS FAIL FAL**
(** is 01 to 99 or 9B.)
FAL No.
Meaning and appropriate response
01 to 99
An FAL(06) instruction has been executed in the program. Check the FAL number to
determine conditions that would cause execution, correct the cause, and clear the
error.
9B
An error has been detected in the PC Setup. Check flags AR 1300 to AR 1302, and
correct as directed.
AR 1300 ON: An incorrect setting was detected in the PC Setup (DM 6600 to
DM 6614) when power was turned ON. Correct the settings in PROGRAM Mode and
turn ON the power again.
AR 1301 ON: An incorrect setting was detected in the PC Setup (DM 6615 to
DM 6644) when switching to RUN or MONITOR mode. Correct the settings in
PROGRAM Mode and switch to RUN or MONITOR mode again.
AR 1302 ON: An incorrect setting was detected in the PC Setup (DM 6645 to
DM 6655) during operation. Correct the settings and clear the error.
154
Section
Self-diagnostic Functions
Message
SCAN TIME OVER
Battery error
(no message)
FAL No.
F8
F7
5-2
Meaning and appropriate response
The cycle time has exceeded 100 ms. (SR 25309 will be ON.)
This indicates that the program cycle time is longer than recommended. Reduce cycle
time if possible. (The CPM2C can be set so that this error won’t be detected.)
If the Low Battery Detection Switch is ON and the voltage of the CPM2C-BAT01
backup battery is below the minimum level, the ERR/ALM indicator will flash and SR
25308 will be turned ON. (See page 42 for details on the Low Battery Detection
Switch.)
Replace the battery. (See 5-7 Battery Replacement for details.)
5-2-4 Fatal Errors
PC operation and program execution will stop and all outputs from the PC will be
turned OFF when any of these errors have occurred. CPM2C operation can’t be
restarted until the PC is turned OFF and then ON again or a Programming Device is used to switch the PC to PROGRAM mode and clear the fatal error.
All CPU Unit indicators will be OFF for the power interruption error. For all other
fatal operating errors, the POWER and ERR/ALM indicators will be lit. The RUN
indicator will be OFF.
Message
Power interruption
(no message)
MEMORY ERR
FALS
No.
None
F1
NO END INST
F0
I/O BUS ERR
C0
Meaning and appropriate response
Power has been interrupted for more than 10 ms (2 ms for DC power types.)
Check power supply voltage and power lines. Try to power-up again.
AR 1308 ON: There is a non-existent bit or word address in the user program. Check
the program and correct errors.
AR 1309 ON: An error has occurred in flash memory. Replace the CPU Unit.
AR 1310 ON: A checksum error has occurred in read-only DM (DM 6144 to DM 6599).
Check and correct the settings in the read-only DM area.
AR 1311 ON: A checksum error has occurred in the PC Setup. Initialize the PC Setup
and input the settings again.
AR 1312 ON: A checksum error has occurred in the program. Check the program and
correct any errors detected.
AR 1313 ON: A checksum error has occurred in the expansion instructions data and all
function codes have been set the their default values. Reset the expansion
instructions.
AR 1314 ON: Data was not maintained in an area specified for holding. Clear the error,
check the data in the areas specified for holding, and try again.
END(01) is not written in the program. Write END(01) at the end of the program.
An error has occurred during data transfer between the CPU Unit and an Expansion
I/O Unit or Expansion Unit. Check the Unit’s connecting cable.
I/O UNIT OVER
E1
Too many Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units have been connected. Check the
Unit configuration.
SYS FAIL FALS**
01 to 99 A FALS(07) instruction has been executed in the program. Check the FALS number to
(** is 01 to 99 or 9F.)
determine the conditions that caused execution, correct the cause, and clear the error.
9F
The cycle time has exceeded the Maximum (Watch) Cycle Time setting (DM 6618).
Check the cycle time and adjust the Maximum Cycle Time setting if necessary.
5-2-5 Communications Errors
The COMM indicator will be turned OFF and AR 0812 will be turned ON if an
error occurs in communications through the peripheral port or AR 0804 will be
turned ON if an error occurs in communications through the RS-232C port.
Check the connecting cables and restart.
There are no error messages or error codes generated by this error and the
ERR/ALM indicator is not affected.
155
Section
Programming Errors
5-3
5-4
Programming Console Operation Errors
The following error messages may appear when performing operations on the
Programming Console. Correct the error as indicated and continue operation.
Message
Meaning and appropriate response
REPL ROM
An attempt was made to write to write-protected memory. Set bits
00 to 03 of DM 6602 to “0.”
PROG OVER The instruction at the last address in memory is not NOP(00). Erase
all unnecessary instructions after END(01).
ADDR OVER An address was set that is larger than the highest memory address
in Program Memory. Input a smaller address.
SETDATA
FALS 00 has been input, and “00” cannot be input. Reinput the
ERR
data.
I/O NO. ERR A data area address has been designated that exceeds the limit of
the data area, e.g., an address is too large. Confirm the
requirements for the instruction and re-enter the address.
Note Refer to the relevant Support Software Operation Manual for details on errors
that may appear when operating the SSS or SYSMAC-CPT Support Software.
5-4
Programming Errors
These errors in program syntax will be detected when the program is checked
using the Program Check operation.
Three levels of program checking are available. The desired level must be designated to indicate the type of errors that are to be detected. The following table
provides the error types, displays, and explanations of all syntax errors. Check
level 0 checks for type A, B, and C errors; check level 1, for type A and B errors;
and check level 2, for type A errors only.
Type
Message
A
????
CIRCUIT ERR
OPERAND
ERR
A constant entered for the instruction is not within defined
values. Change the constant so that it lies within the
proper range.
NO END
INSTR
LOCN ERR
There is no END(01) in the program. Write END(01) at the
end of the program.
An instruction is in the wrong place in the program. Check
instruction requirements and correct the program.
A JME(05) instruction is missing for a JMP(04) instruction.
Correct the jump number or insert the proper JME(05)
instruction.
JME UNDEFD
156
Meaning and appropriate response
The program has been damaged, creating a non-existent
function code. Re-enter the program.
The number of LD instructions (LD or LD NOT) does not
match the number of logic block instructions (OR LD or
AND LD).Check your program.
DUPL
The same jump number or subroutine number has been
used twice. Correct the program so that the same number
is only used once for each.
SBN UNDEFD
An SBN(92) has not been programmed with the same
subroutine number as an SBS(91) instruction in the
program. Correct the program.
STEP ERR
STEP(08) with a section number and STEP(08) without a
section number have been used incorrectly. Check
STEP(08) programming requirements and correct the
program.
Section
Programming Errors
Type
Message
B
IL-ILC ERR
JMP-JME ERR
SBN-RET ERR
C
COIL DUPL
JMP UNDEFD
SBS UNDEFD
5-4
Meaning and appropriate response
IL(02) and ILC(03) are not used in pairs. Correct the
program so that each IL(02) has a unique ILC(03).
Although this error message will appear if more than one
IL(02) is used with the same ILC(03), the program will
executed as written. Make sure your program is written as
desired before proceeding.
JMP(04) and JME(05) are not used in pairs. Make sure
your program is written as desired before proceeding.
RET(93) has not been used properly or the relationship
between SBN(92) and RET(93) is not correct. Correct the
program.
The same bit is being controlled (i.e., turned ON and/or
OFF) by more than one instruction (e.g., OUT, OUT NOT,
DIFU(13), DIFD(14), KEEP(11), SFT(10)). Although this is
allowed for certain instructions, check instruction
requirements to confirm that the program is correct or
rewrite the program so that each bit is controlled by only
one instruction.
JME(05) has been used with no JMP(04) with the same
jump number. Add a JMP(04) with the same number or
delete the JME(05) that is not being used.
A subroutine exists that is not called by SBS(91). Program
a subroutine call in the proper place, or delete the
subroutine if it is not required.
157
Section
Troubleshooting Flowcharts
5-5
5-5
Troubleshooting Flowcharts
Use the following flowcharts to troubleshoot errors that occur during operation.
Main Check
Error
PWR indicator lit?
No
Check power supply. (See page 159.)
Yes
RUN indicator lit?
No
Operation stopped. Check for fatal errors.
(See page 160.)
Yes
ERR/ALM indicator
flashing?
Flashing
Check for non-fatal errors. (See page 161.)
Not lit
Is I/O sequence
normal?
No
Check I/O. (See page 162.)
Yes
Operating
environment normal?
Yes
Replace the CPU
Unit.
158
No
Check operating environment. (See page 164.)
Section
Troubleshooting Flowcharts
5-5
Power Supply Check
PWR indicator not lit.
Is power being
supplied?
No
Connect power
supply.
Yes
No
Is voltage adequate?
No
Is PWR indicator lit?
Yes
Set supply voltage
within acceptable limits.
Yes
Are there any disconnected connectors or
broken wires?
No
Is PWR indicator lit?
Yes
Connect connectors
or replace wires.
Yes
No
No
Replace the CPU
Unit.
Is PWR indicator lit?
Yes
End
159
Section
Troubleshooting Flowcharts
5-5
Fatal Error Check
RUN indicator not lit.
No
Is the ERR/ALM
indicator lit?
Yes
Yes
Determine the cause
of the error with a
Programming Device.
Is PC mode displayed on
Programming Device?
Is PC mode displayed
on Programming
Device?
No
No
Turn the power
supply OFF, and
then ON again.
Yes
Is a fatal error
displayed?
Yes
No
Identify the error, eliminate
its cause, and clear the
error.
Follow the Memory Error
Check flowchart if a
memory error has occurred.
Switch to RUN or
MONITOR mode.
Is the RUN
indicator lit?
No
Yes
End
160
Replace the CPU
Unit.
Section
Troubleshooting Flowcharts
5-5
Non-fatal Error Check
ERR/ALM indicator flashing.
Determine the cause of the error
with a Programming Device.
Is a non-fatal error
indicated?
Yes
Identify the error, eliminate its
cause, and clear the error.
No
Is the ERR/ALM
indicator flashing?
Flashing
Not lit
End
Replace the CPU
Unit.
161
Section
Troubleshooting Flowcharts
I/O Check
The I/O check flowchart is based on the following ladder diagram section.
(LS1)
00002
(LS2)
00003
01003
SOL1
01003
SOL1 malfunction.
Malfunction of SOL1
Is the
IR 01003 output indicator
operating normally?
No
Yes
Check the voltage at the
IR 01003 terminals.
Wire correctly.
Monitor the ON/OFF
status of IR 01003
with a Programming
Device.
No
Operation OK?
No
Yes
Is output wiring
correct?
Operation OK?
Yes
Yes
Disconnect the external wires
and check the conductivity of
each wire.
Yes
Check output device
SOL1.
162
5-5
Operation OK?
No
Replace the CPU Unit Expansion Unit, or Expansion
I/O Unit with the problem.
No
A
To
next
page
Section
Troubleshooting Flowcharts
A
Are the IR 00002
and IR 00003 input indicators operating
normally?
From
previous
page
5-5
No
Yes
Check the voltage at
the IR 00002 and
IR 00003 terminals.
Check the voltage at
the IR 00002 and
IR 00003 terminals.
Operation OK?
Operation OK?
No
Yes
No
Are the terminal
screws loose or connectors disconnected?
Yes
No
Yes
Check operation by using a
dummy input signal to turn the
input ON and OFF.
Yes
Is input wiring
correct?
No
Wire correctly.
No
No
Tighten the terminal
screws and connect
connectors.
Operation OK?
Yes
Replace the CPU Unit,
Expansion Unit, or
Expansion I/O Unit.
Check input devices
LS1 and LS2.
Return to “start.”
Replace the CPU Unit,
Expansion Unit, or
Expansion I/O Unit.
163
Section
Troubleshooting Flowcharts
Environmental Conditions Check
Environmental conditions check
No
Consider using a
fan or cooler.
Is the ambient
temperature above
0°C?
Yes
No
Consider using a
heater.
Is the ambient humidity
between 10% and
85%?
No
Consider using an
air conditioner.
Is the ambient
temperature
below 55°C?
Yes
Yes
Is noise being
controlled?
No
Install surge protectors or other noisereducing equipment
at noise sources.
Yes
Is the installation
environment okay?
Yes
End.
164
No
Consider
constructing an
instrument panel
or cabinet.
5-5
Section
Troubleshooting Flowcharts
5-5
Memory Error Check
Memory error occurred.
AR 1309 ON?
Yes
Replace the CPU
Unit.
Yes
Check/correct backed-up data and
clear error.
No
AR 1314 ON?
No
AR 1308 ON?
Yes
Check the program, correct any
errors, and clear the error.
No
No
AR 1310 to
AR 1312 ON?
No
Yes
Turned ON during
startup?
Yes
Check the error indicated by
the flag that is ON, correct settings as required, and write
data to the flash memory.
No
Check the external
environment.
End
165
Section
Maintenance Inspections
5-6
5-6
Maintenance Inspections
In order for your SYSMAC system to operate in optimum condition, be sure to
carry out daily or periodical inspections.
Inspection Items
The main system components of a SYSMAC system are semiconductors, and it
contains few components with limited lifetimes. Poor environmental conditions,
however, can lead to deterioration of the electrical components, making regular
maintenance necessary.
The standard period for maintenance checks is 6 months to 1 year, but more frequent checks are required if the PC is operated in more demanding conditions.
If the criteria are not met, adjust to within the specified ranges.
Inspection items
Details
Criteria
Remarks
Power supply
Determine whether the voltage fluctuation
at the power supply terminals is within
specifications.
Within the voltage variation
range (see note)
Tester
Environmental
conditions
Is the ambient temperature inside the
panel appropriate?
Is the ambient humidity inside the panel
appropriate?
Has dirt or dust collected?
Is the voltage fluctuation measured at the
I/O terminals within the standard range?
Are all units securely installed?
Are all connection cables and connectors
inserted completely and locked?
Are any of the external wiring screws
loose?
Are any of the external wiring cables
frayed?
Contact output relay
0 to 55_C
Thermometer
10% to 90% RH with no
condensation
None
Each I/O terminal must
conform to the specifications
Nothing is loose
Nothing is loose
Hygrometer
Nothing is loose
Phillips screwdriver
No external abnormalities
Visual inspection
Electrical:
Resistance load:
150,000 operations
Inductive load:
100,000 operations
---
I/O power supply
Installation status
Product service life
Mechanical:
20,000,000 operations
2 years at 25_C
Battery (CPM2C-BAT01)
Visual inspection
Tester
Phillips screwdriver
Visual inspection
---
Note Power supply voltage range:
Power supply
Required Tools
Allowable voltage fluctuation range
100 to 240 VAC (CPM2C-PA201 only)
85 to 264 VAC
24 VDC
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Standard Tools (Required)
• Screwdrivers (Phillips and flat-blade)
• Voltage tester or digital voltage meter
• Industrial alcohol and a cotton cloth
Measurement Devices (May be Needed)
• Synchroscope
• Cathode-ray oscilloscope
• Thermometer, hygrometer
Note Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify the PC in any way.
166
Section
Battery Replacement
5-7
5-7
Battery Replacement
! WARNING The backup battery may explode, catch fire, or leak if dropped, broken apart,
crushed, short-circuited, recharged, heated to 100°C or higher, or burned.
If power has not been supplied to the PC for some time, turn ON the power supply for at least 5 minutes to charge the backup capacitor before replacing the
battery.
Turn OFF the power supply to the PC before replacing the battery. To protect the
contents of memory, this procedure must be completed within 5 minutes.
A label has been included to remind the user when the battery needs to be replaced. After replacing the battery, write the next date that the battery should be
replaced on the label and affix the label in a visible place such as the inside of the
communications port cover.
Be sure to dispose of the old battery in accordance with local laws and regulations.
A CPM2C-BAT01 Backup Battery is built into CPU Units that are equipped with
an internal clock. Replace the battery within two years when used under 25_C.
When the battery voltage drops, the ERR/ALM indicator will flash and SR 25308
will be turned ON. (Refer to page 155.) In this case, replace the battery within
seven days. Use the procedure below when replacing the battery.
1, 2, 3...
1. Stop CPM2C operation and turn OFF the power supply.
2. Remove the battery cover with a flat-blade screwdriver.
Battery cover
3. Remove the battery and disconnect the battery connector.
4. Install the new battery. Be sure that the connector is aligned correctly and
the wires are not pinched or kinked when the battery is inserted.
167
Section
Battery Replacement
5-7
5. To enable the detection of low battery errors, slide the Low Battery Detection
Switch towards the front of the Unit and set bits 12 to 15 of DM 6655 to “0.”
Low Battery Detection Switch
Enable
6. Replace the battery cover.
7. Write the next date that the battery should be replaced on the reminder label.
The battery lifetime of the CPU Unit with clock is 2 years at 25_C and that of
the CPU Unit without clock is 5 years at 25°C.
168
SECTION 6
Expansion Memory Unit
This section describes how to use the CPM1-EMU01-V1 Expansion Memory Unit. Follow the handling precautions and procedures to properly use the Unit.
6-1
6-2
6-3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-1 Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-2 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications and Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-2 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1 Mounting/Removing EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-2 PC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-3 Uploading Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-4 Downloading Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170
170
170
171
171
171
172
172
173
174
175
169
Section
Overview
6-1
6-1
Overview
The CPM1-EMU01-V1 Expansion Memory Unit is a program loader for smallsize or micro PCs. Using the CPM1-EMU01-V1, simple on-site transfer of user
programs and data memory between PCs is possible.
Uploading
Downloading
CPM2C
CPM2C-CN111
EEPROM
CS1W-CN114
CPM2C
Expansion Memory Unit
CPM2C-CIF01
Note The “PLC” in the “DOWNLOAD TO PLC” Button indicates PCs (Programmable
Controllers).
6-1-1 Memory Areas
The memory areas that are uploaded or downloaded vary with the button used
as shown in the following table.
Button
Ladder program
and expansion
instructions
DM 6144 to 6655
UPLOAD + DM
Read from PC to
EEPROM.
UPLOAD
Read from PC to
EEPROM.
DOWNLOAD TO
PLC
All contents of
EEPROM written
to PC.
Not affected.
Note For details on program size, DM area, and the availability of expansion instructions, refer to the relevant PC manual.
6-1-2 Precautions
• Do not attempt to use the CPM1-EMU01-V1 for any applications other than
those described here. Doing so may result in malfunction.
• Do not attempt to upload or download data between different types of PC. Doing so may result in malfunction.
• Do not download when the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode. If downloading is
performed when the PC is running, it will automatically switch to PROGRAM
mode and operation will stop.
• Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify the CPM1-EMU01-V1. Any
attempt to do so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
• After downloading has been completed, be sure to confirm the user program,
data, and expansion instruction information. Not doing so may result in faulty
operation.
170
Section
Specifications and Nomenclature
6-2
• Before touching the EEPROM or the CPM1-EMU01-V1, first touch a grounded
metallic object to discharge any static build-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage.
6-2
Specifications and Nomenclature
6-2-1 Specifications
Item
Specifications
Supported PCs
Read/Write memory areas
Connector
CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1 (-V2),
CQM1, CQM1H
User program: 15.2 Kwords max.
Data memory: DM 6144 to DM 6655
(Read-only DM and PC Setup)
Expansion instructions: 18 instructions
Connector compatible with CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A,
SRM1 (-V2), and CQM1 PCs.
For CPM2C and CQM1H PCs, connect via
CS1W-CN114 or CPM2C-CN111 Connecting Cable.
Communications setting
EEPROM (See note 1.)
1 start bit, 7 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits,
9,600 bps
256-Kbit EEPROM
ATMEL: AT28C256
OMRON: EEROM-JD
Current consumption
129 mA max.
Dimensions
Main body (not including cables or connectors):
57 × 92 × 38 mm (W × H × D)
200 g max. (not including EEPROM)
Weight
Note
1. The EEPROM must be purchased separately.
2. For general specifications, refer to the relevant PC manual.
6-2-2 Nomenclature
Peripheral Port
Connector
Lock Lever
EEPROM Socket
Indicator
UPLOAD + DM Button
DOWNLOAD to PLC Button
UPLOAD Button
Lock Lever
For mounting and removing EEPROM.
DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button
Writes all EEPROM data (ladder programs,
data memory etc.) to the PC.
UPLOAD + DM Button
Reads PC user program and contents of
DM 6144 to DM 6655 to EEPROM.
UPLOAD Button
Reads only PC user program to EEPROM.
Note The “PLC” in the “DOWNLOAD TO PLC” Button indicates PCs (Programmable
Controllers).
171
Section
Handling
LED Indicator
6-3
ERR (red)
6-3
CONNECT
(green)
OFF
Meaning
OFF
Not connected to PC (power supply OFF).
ON
OFF
Connected to a recognized PC.
Blinking
OFF
Uploading/downloading data.
ON
Blinking
Host link communications error, retry by user.
OFF
ON
PC model and EEPROM data not compatible.
OFF
Blinking
One of the following errors has occurred:
An unrecognized PC is connected.
An EEPROM error (EEPROM not present, EEPROM
defect, or no program to download) or checksum
error.
Handling
6-3-1 Mounting/Removing EEPROM
! Caution
Do not mount or remove the EEPROM with the CPM1-EMU01-V1 connected to
the PC. Doing so may damage the EEPROM.
Mounting EEPROM
1, 2, 3...
1. Lift up the lock lever.
2. Straighten the pins on the EEPROM, line up with the socket and lower into
the socket, as shown in the following diagram. If the EEPROM is loose,
place it in the center of the socket.
EEPROM
Lift up the lock lever.
Insert the EEPROM.
3. Gently hold down the EEPROM and pull down the lock lever.
Pull down the lock lever.
172
Section
Handling
Removing EEPROM
6-3
Lift up the lock lever and detach the EEPROM.
6-3-2 PC Connections
! Caution
Mount the EEPROM to the CPM1-EMU01-V1 before connecting the
CPM1-EMU01-V1 to the PC.
! Caution
Do not disconnect the CPM1-EMU01-V1 from the PC when the indicator is blinking green.
CPM2C and CQM1H PCs
When connecting to the CPM2C or CQM1H, connect to the peripheral port via
the CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114 Connecting Cable. Also, set the pins on
the CPU Unit’s DIP switch as follows:
CPM2C
Pin 1: ON (see note)
CQM1H
Pin 2: ON
Pin 5: ON (see note)
Pin 7: ON
Note If pin 1 on the CPM2C or pin 5 on the CQM1H is OFF, connection is still possible if
the peripheral port is set to the defaults.
CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A,
CQM1, and SRM1 (-V2)
PCs
When connecting to the CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CQM1 or SRM1 (-V2),insert
the connector into the peripheral port making sure that the connector is oriented
correctly.
• Insert the connector until it securely locks into place.
• Connections are not possible to the RS-232C port or any other port.
Peripheral Port
Communications
Settings
The peripheral port must be set to the default communications settings shown
below.
Start bits: 1
Data bits: 7
Stop bits: 2
Parity: Even
Baud rate: 9,600 bps
173
Section
Handling
Disconnecting
6-3
Press the levers on the top and bottom of the connector inwards to unlock the
connector and pull out as shown in the following diagram.
Note Do not attempt to remove the connector by pulling the cable.
6-3-3 Uploading Programs
Ladder programs and the contents of data memory can be uploaded to the
EEPROM using the following procedure. The buttons used will determine
whether the contents of data memory are uploaded or not.
CPM2C
CPM2C-CN111
Expansion Memory Unit
EEPROM
CS1W-CN114
CPM2C
Indicator
UPLOAD+DM Button
UPLOAD Button
CPM2C-CIF01
Button
Ladder program and
expansion instructions
DM6144 to 6655
UPLOAD + DM
Read from PC to
EEPROM.
UPLOAD
Read from PC to
EEPROM.
Not affected.
Note Use a Phillips screwdriver or other tool with a diameter of 3.0 mm max. and a
blade length of 10 mm min. to press the upload button.
3.0 dia. max.
10 mm min.
Uploading is possible even if the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode.
174
Section
Handling
6-3
Operation Procedure
Start
Mount the EEPROM to the
CPM1-EMU01-V1.
Mount the EEPROM to the CPM1-EMU01-V1
before connecting to the PC.
Connect the CPM1-EMU01-V1 to the PC’s
communications port (peripheral port).
After 2 or 3 s, check if the indicator is
lit green.
No
Check the orientation of the connector
before connecting the CPM1-EMU01-V1.
Note If the indicator is not lit at all, lit red or
See the note
on the right.
blinks red, uploading will not be possible. In this case, check the following items.
• Is the connector properly connected?
Yes
• Is the EEPROM properly mounted?
Select the memory area to be uploaded.
• Are the EEPROM specifications correct?
• Are the peripheral port communications settings correct?
Upload both the ladder
program and DM 6144 to
DM 6655.
Upload only the ladder
program.
Press the UPLOAD+DM
Button.
Press the UPLOAD Button.
Check if the indicator is blinking green
(indicating that uploading has started).
See the note above.
No
Yes
Check if the indicator is lit green (indicating that uploading has been successfully completed).
No
See the note above.
Yes
Remove the Expansion Memory Unit
from the PC.
End
6-3-4 Downloading Programs
Ladder programs and the contents of data memory can be downloaded from the
EEPROM to the PC using the procedure given below. When downloading, note
the following points.
175
Section
Handling
! Caution
Note
If the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode when downloading is started, it will automatically switch to PROGRAM mode and operation will stop. Confirm that no
adverse effects will occur to the system before downloading. Not doing so may
result in unexpected operation.
1. If the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode, switch the PC mode to PROGRAM
mode.
2. Confirm that the program or other data to be downloaded to the PC is compatible with the PC before downloading.
3. For the CQM1 or CQM1H, when downloading programs that use user-assigned function codes for expansion instructions, be sure that pin 4 on the
CPU Unit’s DIP switch is ON. If these programs are downloaded while the
pin is OFF, the assignments for the expansion instructions will return to their
default settings.
4. After downloading has been completed, be sure to confirm the user program, data, and expansion instructions.
5. When the DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button is pressed, all EEPROM data (ladder programs, data memory etc.) is written to the PC.
CPM2C-CIF01
CPM2C
CPM2C-CN111
Expansion Memory Unit
EEPROM
CS1W-CN114
CPM2C
Indicator
DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button
CPM2C-CIF01
176
6-3
Section
Handling
6-3
Operation Procedure
Start
Mount the EEPROM to the
CPM1-EMU01-V1.
Mount the EEPROM to the
CPM1-EMU01-V1 before downloading.
Change the mode of the PC to PROGRAM mode.
Confirm the safety of the system.
Connect the CPM1-EMU01-V1 to the
PC’s peripheral port.
Confirm the orientation of the connector
before connecting the CPM1-EMU01-V1.
After 2 or 3 s, check if the indicator is
lit green.
No
Note If the indicator is not lit at all, lit red or
See the note on
the right.
• Is the connector properly connected?
Yes
Press the DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button.
• Is the EEPROM properly mounted?
• Are the EEPROM specifications correct?
• Are the peripheral port communications settings correct?
Check if the indicator is blinking
green (indicating that downloading
has started).
No
blinks red, downloading will not be
possible. In this case, check the following items.
See the note above.
Yes
Check if the indicator is lit green
(indicating that downloading has
been successfully completed).
No
See the note above.
Yes
Remove the Expansion Memory Unit
from the PC.
Check the program.
Before actual operation, check the contents
of the ladder program and the DM area, as
well as the expansion instruction settings.
End
177
Appendix A
Standard Models
CPU Units
Description
CPU Units with
relay outputs
Input
points
6 points
Output
points
4 points ---
Yes
CPU Units with
transistor outputs
6 points
Model number
Internal
clock
4 points --Yes
12 points 8 points --Yes
Relay outputs
CPM2C-10CDR-D
---
Transistor outputs
Sinking
Sourcing
---
CPM2C-10C1DR-D ---
---
---
CPM2C-10CDTC-D
CPM2C-10CDT1C-D
---
CPM2C-10C1DTC-D
CPM2C-10C1DT1C-D
---
CPM2C-20CDTC-D
CPM2C-20CDT1C-D
---
CPM2C-20C1DTC-D
CPM2C-20C1DT1C-D
179
Appendix A
Standard Models
Expansion I/O Units
Description
Input
points
Output
points
Expansion I/O Unit with
relay outputs
6 points
4 points
Expansion I/O Units with
transistor outputs
Model number
Relay outputs
Transistor outputs
Sinking
Sourcing
---
CPM2C-10EDR
---
16 points 8 points
---
CPM2C-24EDTC
CPM2C-24EDT1C
Expansion I/O Unit
with DC inputs only
8 points
CPM2C-8EDC
Expansion I/O Unit
with DC inputs only
16 points ---
CPM2C-16EDC
Expansion I/O Units
with relay outputs only
---
8 points
CPM2C-8ER
---
---
Expansion I/O Units
with transistor outputs
only
---
8 points
---
CPM2C-8ETC
CPM2C-8ET1C
---
16 points
---
CPM2C-16ETC
CPM2C-16ET1C
---
I/O Connectors (OMRON Products)
Connector
180
Description
C500-CE241
24-pin soldered connector with cover
C500-CE242
24-pin crimp connector with cover
C500-CE243
24-pin pressure connector
Appendix A
Standard Models
Expansion Units
Analog I/O Unit
Model
CPM2C-MAD11
Name
Analog I/O Unit
Specifications
2 analog inputs, 1 analog output
Temperature Sensor Units
Model
CPM2C-TS001
CPM2C-TS101
Name
Specifications
Temperature Sensor 2 thermocouple inputs
Unit
2 platinum resistance thermometer inputs
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit
Model
CPM2C-SRT21
Name
CompoBus/S I/O
Link Unit
Specifications
Allocates CPM2C I/O (8 inputs and 8 outputs) when
CPM2C used as a CompoBus Slave.
AC Power Supply Unit
Model
CPM2C-PA201
Name
AC Power Supply
Unit
Specifications
Input: 100 to 240 VAC
Output: 24 VDC/600 mA
Communications Port Connecting Cables
Connector
Description
Cable length
CPM2C-CN111
Connecting Cable
Converts the CPM2C CPU Unit’s communications
port to a peripheral port and RS-232C port.
0.15 m (about 4”)
CS1W-CN114
Connecting Cable
Converts the CPM2C CPU Unit’s communications
port to a peripheral port.
0.05 m (about 2”)
CS1W-CN118
Connecting Cable
Converts the CPM2C CPU Unit’s communications
port to an RS-232C port.
0.1 m (about 2”)
181
Appendix A
Standard Models
Peripheral Devices
Name
Programming Console
Appearance
Model Number
Specifications
CQM1-PRO01-E
2-m Connecting Cable attached
C200H-PRO27-E
Hand-held, w/backlight; requires one of the
Connecting Cables listed below.
C200H-CN222
Connects the C200H-PRO27-E to a
peripheral port.
2-m cable
2-m cable
CS1W-CN624
Connects the C200H-PRO27-E
directly to the CPM2C CPU Unit’s
communications port.
CX-Programmer
WS02-CXPC1-E
For MS-Windows 95/98 (CD-ROM)
SYSMAC-CPT
WS01-CPTB1-E
For IBM PC/AT or compatible computers
(3.5” disks (2HD) and CD-ROM)
SYSMAC Support
Software
C500-ZL3AT1-E
3.5”, 2HD for IBM PC/AT compatible
C200H-CN422
CS1W-CN224
4-m cable
6-m cable
Maintenance Accessories
Name
Appearance
Model Number
Specifications
Backup Battery
CPM2C-BAT01
---
Expansion Memory Unit
CPM1-EMU01-V1
Uploads the ladder program and DM 6144
to DM 6655 from the PC to the EEPROM
and downloads the ladder program and
DM 6144 to DM 6655 from the EEPROM
to the PC.
EEPROM
EEROM-JD
256 Kbits
182
Appendix A
Standard Models
Adapters and Connecting Cables
CPM2C
communications
port usage
Peripheral
Name
Appearance
Model number
Comments
Cable length
RS-232C
Adapter
Peripheral/
RS-232C
Adapter
Unit
CQM1-CIF02
For a 9-pin computer serial port
3.3 m
CPM2C-CIF01
Use for peripheral port to
RS-232C conversion.
---
RS-232C
Cable
For a 25-pin computer serial port
RS-232C Cables
XW2Z-200S
XW2Z-500S
XW2Z-200S-V
XW2Z-500S-V
XW2Z-070T-1
(For use with the
NT-AL001.)
XW2Z-070T-1
RS-232C
2m
5m
For a 9-pin computer serial port
2m
5m
Use for CPM2C RS-232C port to NT-AL001
connection. (70-cm cable)
Use for CPM2C RS-232C port to NT-AL001
connection. (2-m cable)
Adapters (1:N Connections)
Name
Appearance
Model number
Specifications
RS-422 Adapter
NT-AL001
Use for CPM2C RS-232C port to RS-422A conversion.
Requires a 5-VDC, 150 mA power supply which is
supplied through the CPM2C connection.
(Can also be connected to a personal computer, but this
connection requires an external 5-VDC power supply.)
Link Adapter
B500-AL004
Use for personal computer RS-232C port to RS-422A
conversion.
(Can also be connected to a CPM2C.)
RS-422/RS-232C
Adapter Unit
CPM2C-CIF11
Use for CPM2C peripheral port to RS-422 conversion.
183
Appendix B
Dimensions
All dimensions are in millimeters.
CPU Units
CPU Units with Relay Outputs
(CPM2C-10CDR-D, CPM2C-10C1DR-D)
CPU Units with Transistor Outputs
(CPM2C-j0CDTC-D, CPM2C-j0C1DTC-D,
CPM2C-j0CDT1C-D, CPM2C-j0C1DT1C-D)
185
Appendix B
Dimensions
Expansion I/O Units
Units with Relay Outputs
(CPM2C-10EDR/8ER)
Units with Transistor Outputs
(CPM2C-24EDTC, CPM2C-24EDT1C)
90
Units with Inputs or Outputs Only
(CPM2C-8EDC, CPM2C-8ETC, CPM2C-8ET1C,
CPM2C-16EDC, CPM2C-16ETC, CPM2C-16ET1C)
20
65
90
CPM2C-PA201 AC Power Supply Unit
65
40
186
76.8
Appendix B
Dimensions
Expansion Units
90
CPM2C-MAD11 Analog I/O Unit
65
33
90
CPM2C-TS001, CPM2C-TS101 Temperature Sensor Units
65
33
90
CPM2C-SRT21 CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit
20
65
187
Appendix B
Dimensions
Adapter Units
CPM2C-CIF11 RS-422/RS-232C
Adapter Unit
90
90
CPM2C-CIF01 Peripheral/RS-232C
Adapter Unit
33
65
33
65
CPM2C Units with Connectors Attached
Units with Relay Outputs
188
Units with Transistor Outputs
(Using pressure connectors)
Units with Transistor Outputs
(Using soldered connectors)
Appendix B
Dimensions
Weights
Unit
Power Supply Unit
CPU Units
Expansion I/O Units
Expansion Units
Peripheral/RS-232C
Adapter Unit
Rs-422/RS-232C Adapter
Unit
Model number
Weight
CPM2C-PA201
250 g max.
CPM2C-10CDR-D
CPM2C-10C1DR-D
CPM2C-10CDTC-D
CPM2C-10CD1DTC-D
CPM2C-10CDT1C-D
CPM2C-10C1TDT1C-D
CPM2C-20CDTC-D
CPM2C-C1DTC-D
CPM2C-20CDT1C-D
CPM2C-20C1DT1C-D
CPM2C-10EDR
CPM2C-24EDTC
CPM2C-24EDT1C
CPM2C-8EDC
CPM2C-16EDC
CPM2C-8ER
CPM2C-8ETC
CPM2C-8ET1C
CPM2C-16ETC
CPM2C-16ET1C
CPM2C-MAD11
CPM2C-TS001
CPM2C-TS101
CPM2C-SRT21
CPM2C-CIF01
200 g max.
200 g max.
200 g max.
200 g max.
200 g max.
200 g max.
200 g max.
200 g max.
200 g max.
200 g max.
200 g max.
200 g max.
200 g max.
150 g max.
150 g max.
200 g max.
150 g max.
150 g max.
150 g max.
150 g max.
200 g max.
200 g max.
200 g max.
150 g max.
150 g max.
CPM2C-CIF11
150 g max.
189
Index
Numbers
1:1 connections, 100
1:N connections, 97
A
AC Power Supply Unit. See Power Supply Unit
Adapter Units
available models, 10, 183
components, 54
dimensions, 188
Adapters, available models, 183
Analog I/O Unit
See also Expansion Units
available models, 181
components, 51
dimensions, 187
arc killer, examples, xviii
ASCII, converting displays, Programming Console, 143
atmosphere, 30
B
basic functions, 19
battery, replacing, 167
binary data, modifying, Programming Console, 140
bit status, force-set/reset, Programming Console, 142
bits, searching, Programming Console, 130
buzzer operation, Programming Console, 124
C
cabinet
installation, precautions, 61
Programming Console installation, 115
cables, available models, 181
characteristics, 30
check levels, program checks, 156
checking, program syntax, Programming Console, 132
circuit configuration
inputs, 34
outputs
relay, 37
transistor, 38
clearing, memory areas, Programming Console, 123
clock, reading and setting the clock, 144
communications
capabilities, 20
overview, 5
errors, 155
CompoBus/S I/O Link, 100
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit
See also Expansion Units
available models, 181
components, 53
dimensions, 187
components
Adapter Units, 54
Analog I/O Unit, 51
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit, 53
CPU Units, 40
Expansion I/O Units, 45
Power Supply Unit, 58
Temperature Sensor Units, 52
conduit installation, 66
connectors
available models, 180
dimensions, 188
counters
changing SV, Programming Console, 138
example of inputting, 148
CPM1A, function comparison, 20
CPM2A, function comparison, 20
CPU Units
available models, 7, 179
components, 40
cyclic operation, 14
dimensions, 185
general specifications, 30
input specifications, 34
internal structure, 11
cycle time, displaying, Programming Console, 144
cyclic operation, 14
D
data, modifying, Programming Console, 137–138, 139, 140,
141
data link, 5, 100
date. See clock
decimal data with sign. See signed decimal data
decimal data without sign. See unsigned decimal data
dielectric strength, 30
differentiated instructions, entering, 128
dimensions, 185
DIN Track installation, 64
displays
converting between hex and ASCII, Programming Console,
143
cycle time, Programming Console, 144
downloading, programs, 175
duct installation, 65
191
Index
E
functions, 6
comparison, 20
EC Directives, precautions, xvi
EEPROM
mounting/removing, 172
specifications, 171
electrical noise, preventing, 62, 65
ERR/ALM indicator
flashing, 154
lit, 155
errors
communications, 155
error processing, 151
fatal, 155
identifying, 153
non-fatal, 154
programming, 156
Programming Console operations, 156
reading/clearing messages, Programming Console, 124
user-defined errors, 154
Expansion I/O Units
available models, 9, 180
components, 45
connections, 62
dimensions, 186
general specifications, 30
input specifications, 36
expansion instructions, 113
reading and changing function code assignments, 125
H–I
hexadecimal data, converting displays, Programming Console,
143
humidity, 30
I/O capacity, 30
I/O connectors
available models, 180
pin allocation
CPU Units, 43
Expansion I/O Units, 47
wiring, 70
I/O errors, troubleshooting, 162
I/O line noise, preventing, 65
I/O refreshing, immediate refreshing, 17
I/O terminals, allocation
CPU Units, 43
Expansion I/O Units, 47
immediate refreshing, 17
indicators
CompoBus/S LED indicators, 54
flashing ERR/ALM indicator, 154
lit ERR/ALM indicator, 155
PC status indicators, 41
Expansion Memory Unit, 169
connections, 173
inductive loads, 82, 93
Expansion Units
available models, 10, 181
components, 51
connections, 62
dimensions, 187
specifications, 30
input devices, connections, 79
F
initialization, time required, 13
input specifications
CPU Units, 34
Expansion I/O Units, 36
inputs, wiring, 75
configuration, 75
inrush current, 30
suppressing, 93
inspections, 166
FAL numbers, 154
FAL(06), 154
FALS numbers, 155
FALS(07), 154
false inputs, 81
fatal errors, troubleshooting, 160
features, 2
installation, 64
site, selecting, 61
instructions
inserting and deleting, Programming Console, 131
searching, Programming Console, 129
insulation resistance, 30
interlocks, 60
interrupt program execution, in cyclic operation, 16
flash memory, precautions, 152
flicker output, example, 149
force-set/reset
clearing, Programming Console, 143
Programming Console, 142
function codes, reading and changing expansion instruction
assignments, 125
192
L
leakage current, 81
LED indicators, 41
limit switches, preventing false inputs, 81
Index
M
machine control functions, list, 18
maintenance, 166
accessories, 182
functions, 20
memory
backup, 32
Expansion Memory Unit, 169
protection, 32
memory areas
clearing, Programming Console, 123
partial clear, 123
uploading/downloading, 170
messages, reading/clearing, 124
model numbers, 179
modes
changing the PC mode, 118
operating modes, 12
modifying
binary data, Programming Console, 140
data, Programming Console, 137
hexadecimal/BCD data, Programming Console, 139
signed decimal data, Programming Console, 140
SV, Programming Console, 138
unsigned decimal data, Programming Console, 141
MONITOR mode
description, 109, 119
example test run, 150
monitoring
3-word monitor, Programming Console, 136
binary monitor, Programming Console, 135–136
differentiation monitor, Programming Console, 134–135
signed decimal monitor, Programming Console, 136–137
status, Programming Console, 132
unsigned decimal monitor, Programming Console, 137
motor control, capabilities, 3
MSG(46), 154
N
no-protocol communications, 98
noise
immunity, 30
preventing electrical noise, 62, 65
non-fatal errors, troubleshooting, 161
O
operating conditions, troubleshooting, 164
operating modes, 12
operating mode at startup, 12
operation, preparations, 120
output short protection, 92
output specifications
relay output, 37
transistor output, 38
output wiring
configuration, 82
relay output, 82, 85, 86
transistor output
sinking, 83, 84, 85, 87, 88
sourcing, 83, 84, 86, 87, 88
P
panel
installation, precautions, 61
Programming Console installation, 115
password, entering on Programming Console, 120
PC mode, changing, 118
PC status, indicators, 41
Peripheral Devices, available models, 182
photoelectric switches, preventing false inputs, 81
platinum resistance thermometer, 4
PNP current output, connections, 79
position control, 3
power, consumption, 30
power cables, 65
power interruption, detection, 13
power supply
interrupt time, 30
precautions, 60
troubleshooting, 159, 165
wiring, 66
Power Supply Unit
available models, 8, 181
components, 58
dimensions, 186
specifications, 33
wiring, 67
precautions
design precautions, 60
general, xi
output wiring, 92
SYSMAC Support Software, 112
uploading/downloading, 170
NPN current output, connections, 79
program memory, setting address and reading content, Programming Console, 126
NPN open collector, connections, 79
PROGRAM mode, description, 109, 119
NT Link, connections, 99
Programmable Terminal, connections, 99
193
Index
programming
checking the program, 150
checks for syntax, Programming Console, 132
errors, 156
example, 145
inserting and deleting instructions, Programming Console,
131–132
preparation for, 145
procedures, 147
searching, Programming Console, 129–130
setting and reading a memory address, Programming Console, 126
Programming Console
connections, 94, 114
keys, 116
models, 116
operation errors, 156
operations, 122
using, 114
Programming Devices
connections, 94
using, 103
programs
checking, check levels, 156
downloading, 175
entering and editing, Programming Console, 126
execution, in cyclic operation, 15
program capacity, 30
uploading, 174
proximity switches, preventing false inputs, 81
signed decimal data
modifying, Programming Console, 140
monitoring, 136–137
specifications
characteristics, 30
Expansion Memory Unit, 171
general specifications, 30
I/O connectors, 71
input specifications
CPU Units, 34
Expansion I/O Units, 36
output specifications
relay output, 37
transistor output, 38
Power Supply Unit, 33
terminal blocks, 69
weights, 189
SSS, 111
status, monitoring, Programming Console, 132
Support Software, 104
SV, modifying, Programming Console, 138
syntax, checking the program, Programming Console, 132
SYSMAC Support Software. See SSS
SYSMAC-CPT Support Software, 104
precautions, 104
system
checks, 152
configuration, 7
PT connections, 99
pulse control, 3
pulse outputs, 3
wiring, 92
Q–R
quick-response inputs, 3
relay outputs, connections, 79
Relay Terminals, connections, 74
RS-422 port, connection, 94
RUN mode, description, 109, 119
S
search
instruction, Programming Console, 129–130
operands, Programming Console, 130
self-diagnosis functions, 32
self-holding bit, example, 147
self-diagnostic functions, 153
serial communications, 98
shock resistance, 30
194
T
temperature, operating, storage, 30
Temperature Sensor Units
See also Expansion Units
available models, 181
components, 52
dimensions, 187
terminal blocks
connections, 74
specifications, 69
wiring, 69
test run
example, 150
procedure, 152
thermocouple, 4
time. See clock
timers
changing SV, Programming Console, 138
example of inputting, 148
troubleshooting, 158
fatal errors, 160
I/O errors, 162
non-fatal errors, 161
operating conditions, 164
power supply, 159, 165
Index
U–W
unsigned decimal data
modifying, Programming Console, 141
monitoring, 137
uploading, programs, 174
vibration resistance, 30
voltage
operating voltage range, 30
output, connections, 79
supply voltage, 30
weight, 189
wiring, 65
I/O connectors, 70
power supply, 66
terminal blocks, 69
195
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W356-E1-2
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
1
2
Date
June 1999
January 2000
Revised content
Original production
Major revisions throughout the manual. Information altered on the Analog I/O
Unit, Temperature Sensor Units, the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit, Expansion I/O
Units, Adapter Units, the AC Power Supply Unit, the Expansion Memory Unit,
Relay Terminals, Terminal Blocks, and Programming Console connections.
197
